UC-NRLF 
 
 B E fi3b 3DD 
 
 I 
 
^ 
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 The John J. and Hanna M. McManus 
 
 Morris N. and Chesley V. Young 
 
 Collection 
 
 A 
 
Copyrighted 1897 
 
 BY 
 
 A. ROTERBERG. 
 
IWew Era Cari) ZLricke, 
 
 — BY— 
 
 K. ROTERBERC, 
 
 Author of 
 
 "THE MODERN WIZfIRD" and "LflTTER DAY TRICKS" 
 
 284 PAGES. . 204 ILLUSTRflTIONS. 
 
 2 FULL PflGE HflLF TONE ENGRAVINGS. 
 
 Drawings by L. R. Gossett. 
 
 PRICE $2.00. 
 
 PUBLISHED BY THE AUTHOR. 
 
 Messrs W. & p. Iian)ley. 
 
 231 HIGH HOLBORN, LONDON, W. 0. 
 Sole Agents for England. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 |8|NC0URAGED by the flattering reception given to 
 '^ my previous works, I herewith submit to the con- 
 «^il J^^i^^ world of this country and England, a des- 
 cription of the very latest card tricks, many of 
 which are now, for the first time, made public. Particular 
 attention is called to the many new sleights, which no doubt 
 will receive a hearty welcome from those of my readers who 
 have made this very fascinating field of conjuring a special 
 study. 
 
 In the present work, I have been greatly assisted by the 
 well known experts, Messrs. W. E. Robinson, J. W. Elliott 
 and Adrian Plate, whom I hereby thank heartily for the 
 many favors so cheerfully bestowed. I also acknowledge 
 my indebtedness to Prof. Conradi, of Dresden, Germany, 
 who kindly permitted me to make several extracts from his 
 book, "Der Moderne Kartenkuenstler. " 
 
 Hoping this book will prove of benefit to both the ama- 
 teur and professional conjurer, I remain 
 
 Sincerely, 
 
 A. ROTERBERG. 
 
 LOAM ^T&nc 
 
 C^qT^f^ 
 
mi 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 jN ORDER to become a successful conjurer with cards, 
 it is absolutely necessary that the learner should first 
 ^ thoroughly familiarize himself with the various sleights 
 upon which the most effective card tricks are based. 
 It is impossible to devote too much time to the acquirement 
 and practice of these moves, there being practically no limit 
 to the degree of dexterity that can be reached by practice 
 and only by practice. 
 
 After the necessary degree of proficiency in the sleights 
 has been acquired, each trick that the beginner intends to 
 perform, must be carefully laid out and clothed, as it were, 
 with a certain speech, technically termed "patter," the ob- 
 ject of which is to cause the trick itself to assume, in the 
 minds of the spectators, a plausible appearance. 
 
 The performer's manner should be suave, but not over 
 polite, a mistake made by most beginners. Over politeness 
 tends to reduce the performer to a level below that of the 
 spectators; whereas, his object is to convey the impression 
 that he is a being gifted with an inexplicable power. 
 
 850 
 
gl^i^IG^fi*!'^- 
 
 IHE TWO principal sleights used in card tricks are 
 the "Pass" and the "Force," both of which may 
 safely be called the sine qua non of card conjuring. 
 As the "Force" is practically the "Pass" with an 
 addition to it, I shall first endeavor to teach my reader the 
 "Pass, " which may be executed either with both hands or 
 with one hand only. 
 
 TUB nOUBLB HANDBD PASS. 
 
 [HE PURPOSE of the sleight is to cause the upper 
 and lower parts of the pack, divided into halves 
 by the little finger, which is held between them, 
 to change places; that is, the upper part of the 
 pack is made to take the place of the lower one and vice 
 versa. Usually a selected card is placed on the lower half 
 of the pack, the upper half is then placed on top of this, 
 whereupon, the pass is made in the twinkling of an eye, the 
 conjurer's object, to bring the selected card from the middle 
 to the top of the pack, being thereby attained. 
 
 For this purpose, the pack is held in the left hand, be- 
 ing divided into two nearly equal parts by the little finger, 
 which is inserted between them. Fig. 2. (Most American 
 conjurers, including myself, prefer the insertion of the third 
 
8 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 linger instead of the fourth one, as it allows the fingers to 
 grip the packet more firmly.) The pack is now covered by 
 the right hand (Fig. 1), which seizes the lower half of the 
 pack, the fingers being stationed on the upper edge of the 
 cards and the thumb at the bottom. Under cover of the 
 right hand, the upper half of the pack, which is held clipped 
 between the third and fourth fingers, is drawn away till it 
 just clears the lower half. 
 
 FIG. 1. 
 
 Simultaneously with this movement, the right hand lifts 
 up the lower half, the root of the thumb acting as a support. 
 Thus both packets are just made to pass each other without 
 actually touching, both having now changed places. 
 
 A close inspection of Fig. 3 will serve to illustrate this 
 transposition still better. The shaded part (No. 2) in the 
 drawing, represents the lower packet, while the lighter one 
 (No. 1) indicates the upper one. The original position of 
 these two halves is shown in A; while in B, the upper part 
 of the pack is represented in the act of being tilted upwards 
 by the third and fourth fingers of the left hand. In C, the 
 lifting of the lower packet is illustrated; in D, both halves 
 are seen to have passed each other. E shows the new posi- 
 tion of the two packets. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 FIG. Z. 
 
 FIG. 3. 
 
10 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The beginner will at first find the making of the pass a 
 rather awkward and difiicult task, but as he continues to 
 practice, the fingers will begin to become more pliable, as it 
 were, and act in unconscious unison. In a few weeks the 
 pass can be mastered so that tricks depending on it, can be 
 safely exhibited. An ideal pass, which must be absolutely 
 noiseless, quick as a flash, and practically invisible, will, 
 however, take a year or more to acquire, and even then con- 
 stant practice must be devoted to it. 
 
 THE HERRMANN PASS. 
 
 |HE double handed pass, that I am about to describe, 
 was a favorite with the late Alexander Herrmann, 
 who delighted to puzzle with it people versed in 
 the usual sleights. In this pass, which depends 
 almost exclusively upon misdirection, no change of the two 
 halves of the pack can possibly be seen, no matter how close 
 the spectator watches for it. The secret lies in the fact that 
 the upper front half of the pack is held in an upright posi- 
 tion. Behind this half, under cover of which the transposi- 
 tion of the two packets is effected, the spectator is not al- 
 lowed to see. 
 
 In the first position of the two packets, the lower or, 
 rather, the rear one, is held in the left hand, the first joints 
 of the second and third fingers being stationed at the side of 
 the cards, while the first and little fingers lie curled up be- 
 hind it (Fig. 4). The upper, or front packet, C, is held in 
 the right hand, in the position as shown in Fig. 4, the thumb 
 being located above, and the fingers below the cards, expos- 
 ing as much of them as possible. 
 
 Both packets are held in a perpendicular position, C be- 
 ing turned towards the spectators. Under cover of C, the 
 packet B which is slipped between the fingers of the left 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 11 
 
 hand is tilted downwards and passed around the front of C, 
 being then placed on the latter. Fig. 5 illustrates the act of 
 packet B passing around C. The two halves then occupy 
 the position shown in Fig. 6. 
 
 FIG. 4. 
 After my reader has once understood the principle and 
 purpose of this pass, he will be surprised how very useful 
 
 FIG. 5. 
 the latter will prove in cases, where the spectator, in a spirit 
 of contrariness, refuses to have his attention diverted by the 
 
12 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 performer's patter and insists upon riveting his eyes upon 
 the conjurer's hands. 
 
 The best way in which to use this pass, will be to have 
 the selected card laid on packet B, upon which C is then 
 placed, its back being turned towards the spectators who, as 
 we will take for granted, keep their eye on the rear card. 
 The pass is then made under cover of C as explained, the 
 pack being turned face upwards during this operation, thus 
 completely disguising the sleight. 
 
 FIG. 6. 
 
 Another excellent use to which this pass may be put, is 
 to convince the spectators that the selected card is neither 
 at the top, nor at the bottom of the pack. The card in this 
 case occupies the top place, the regular double handed pass 
 is then made, whereby the card is brought to the middle of 
 the pack, both packets being held in readiness for the exe- 
 cution of the "Herrmann Pass."' After having exhibited 
 the top card, the performer turns over the left hand, which 
 holds the pack, and shows that the bottom card is not the 
 chosen one either. In turning back the left hand into its 
 original position, in which act it is assisted by the right, the 
 "Herrmann Pass" is made and the desired card is thus 
 brought once more to the top of the pack. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 13 
 
 THE CHARLIEB PASS. 
 
 IS the pass of this name is by far the best one of all 
 single handed passes, I shall describe it only. 
 The pack is held in the left hand, as shown in Fig. 
 8, the thumb being kept at one side of the cards 
 and the second and third fingers at the other side, while the 
 first and fourth fingers lie slightly bent beneath the pack. 
 
 By slightly unloosing the thumb, the lower half of the 
 pack is allowed to drop down into the position shown in 
 Fig. 8, the first and fourth fingers immediately receiving 
 this packet, and pushing it over towards the thumb, press- 
 
 FIG. 7. 
 ing it in an upright position against the latter. The upper 
 pack is now allowed to drop down, as shown in Fig. 9, the 
 former lower half being then placed on top of it (Fig. 10). 
 
 Although the various stages of theCharlier pass are illus- 
 trated and described, it must however, be understood that 
 these different moves must blend into each other and be prac- 
 tically made one. (This same remark may be applied to the 
 two passes previously explained. ) In practising this pass the 
 right hand ought to be left out of the play altogether, the 
 left hand only being used in placing the cards in the posi- 
 tion shown in Fig. 2. 
 
14 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The usual method of employing this pass is to hold the 
 pack in the position shown in Fig. 7 and to request the per- 
 son to insert his card in the pack thus offered to him. As 
 
 FIG. 8. 
 he is about to do so, the performer allows the lower half of 
 the pack to drop into the position seen in Pig. 8, thereby 
 silently inviting the spectator to place his card in the open- 
 ing thus made. The right hand then aiVproaches the pack 
 
 FIG. 9. 
 and shields it for an instant, at the same time the left hand 
 is rather quickly drawn back, the right hand following, the 
 pass being invisibly made under cover of these movements. 
 
NEW EKA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 15 
 
 An improvement, or rather Charlier's original way of 
 performing this pass, consists of allowing the spectator to 
 replace his card on the lower half of the pack, after which 
 the conjurer calmly allows the upper half to drop on top of 
 it. Those of my readers, who are familiar with the ' ' Char- 
 lier Pass" will no doubt exclaim, "Why, that is not the 
 Charlier Pass as the selected card is now in the middle of 
 the pack. " So it is, my dear reader, but wait a moment be- 
 
 FIG. 10. 
 
 fore jumping at conclusions. If the card is in the middle of 
 the pack at present, that is no reason why it should stay 
 there. Neither does it. In dropping the upper half on the 
 lower half, the performer manages so that a step:] is formed 
 by the two packets. Firmly holding the pack in this posi- 
 tion, he simply bides his chance of being unobserved, and 
 when this opportunity arrives, with the left thumb simply 
 lifts the former upper half of the pack back into its original 
 position and then makes the pass in the regular fashion. 
 
 ^ 
 
16 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 THB FORCE. 
 
 ^T THE forcing of one or more cards is understood 
 the sleight whereby a person is compelled, but 
 without his knowledge, to draw such cards out of 
 the pack, that the conjurer wishes to have selected. 
 There is a certain indefinable something about the force, in 
 influencing the spectator's choice in an unnoticeable manner. 
 This part of the sleight is practically impossible to explain, 
 but will be readily understood and learned by the beginner 
 after the latter has made a few experiments on that subject. 
 But now to the mechanical part of the force itself. Af- 
 ter requesting the spectators to shuffle the pack thoroughly, 
 the performer receives it back nnd quickly notices the bot- 
 tom card. In the act of advancing toward a spectator, he 
 makes the double handed pass, bringing the bottom card to 
 the middle of the pack, which he immediately spreads out 
 in fan shape, requesting the spectator to select a card. Just 
 as the spectator is about to take a card, the performer, who 
 has in the meantime gradually passed the upper half of the 
 cards from one hand into the other, arrives at the former 
 bottom card, of which he has carefully kept track, and ex- 
 posing this card a trifle more than the others, causes the 
 spectator's choice, in nine cases out of ten, to fall upon this 
 particular card. The beginner is cautioned not to commit 
 the usual mistake of exposing or offering the desired card at 
 too early a stage of the "Force." At the moment that the 
 spectator's fingers are about to close on a card, the desired 
 card must be there and not sooner. 
 
 In case the performer fails to force a particular card, 
 the customary expedient is to request a person to retain the 
 drawn card, whereupon the conjurer goes to a more obliging 
 person (ladies are the easiest to force cards on) and after 
 forcing the desired card, does the trick he originally intend- 
 ed to perform, after which he requests the first spectator to 
 replace his card in the pack which is then shuffled. The 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 17 
 
 conjurer then performs with this card one of the many exist- 
 ing tricks with a chosen card. 
 
 After a performer has thoroughly mastered the art of 
 forcing, he can even venture to force a card while the pack 
 is held by one hand only. The desired card in this case is 
 the top card. In the act of advancing toward the spectator, 
 the performer makes the ''Charlier Pass," thereby bringing 
 the card from the top to the middle of the pack, but allow- 
 ing the two packets to form a step. The upper packet is 
 then spread a. little by the left thumb, but none of the cards 
 are exposed nearly as much as the desired card, which is the 
 top card of the lower heap. Upon requesting a spectator to 
 kindly select a card, the latter's choice will most always fall 
 upon the card that is exposed the most. Dependant upon 
 this fact, is a still bolder form of forcing, the cards in this 
 case being placed on a tray held by the performer. In ar- 
 ranging the cards, the performer simply takes care to expose 
 the card or cards that he intends to force, more than any of 
 the others. 
 
 CHANGES. 
 
 jHE OBJECT of all sleights of this name is to change 
 a card held in the right hand for the top card of 
 the pack, which is held in the left. Changes are 
 especially useful when the performer has made a 
 mistake, having by some accident lost the chosen card. 
 Taking any card out of the pack, he places it, without show- 
 ing its face, on the table, and boldly asserts that it is the 
 chosen card, which he requests its owner to name. Upon 
 thus becoming acquainted with the name of this card, he 
 spreads out the pack, under the pretext of showing that the 
 chosen card is not contained among the others. In reality, 
 he quickly finds this card and slips it behind the others, 
 
18 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 thus bringing it to the top of the pack. Picking up the 
 card on the table, he adroitly changes it for the top card of 
 the pack, i. e., the chosen one, and exhibits it. 
 
 The changes mostly employed by conjurers, are the ' 'Top 
 Change" and the "Bottom Change," a description of which 
 is herewith given. 
 
 THE TOP CHANGE. 
 
 IHE CARD to be changed is held face downward 
 between the thumb and first finger of the right 
 hand, while the pack is kept in the left hand, the 
 thumb lying loosely across the back of the cards, 
 the finger being stationed at the bottom of the pack, which 
 of course is also held face downwards. Just a moment 
 
 FIG. 11. 
 previous to the "Change, "the thumb of the left hand se- 
 cretely pushes the top card of the pack over towards the 
 right, thereby causing it to project over a trifle beyond the 
 rest of the cards. The hands are then brought together for 
 an instant only, and the top card of the pack is quickly 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 19 
 
 seized by the first and second fingers of the right hand (Fig. 
 11) which is immediately withdrawn, leaving the card it 
 formerly contained on the top of the pack, being retained 
 there by the thumb. The act of bringing the two hands to- 
 gether is generally disguised by some appropriate gesture 
 by the performer, who, after having successfully executed 
 the sleight, usually rubs the card on his sleeve or requests 
 some spectator to breathe upon it, then showing that the 
 card has changed into another. 
 
 This change, if adroitly executed, is practically im- 
 possible to detect. It is one of the most useful of sleights 
 and for this reason ought to be practiced until the beginner 
 is thoroughly proficient in it. 
 
 THE BOTTOM CHANGE. 
 
 ^^^^N THIS form of the sleight, the card to be exchanged 
 for the one on the top of the pa^k is left at the bottom 
 I of the latter. The pack is kept in the left hand be- 
 tween the thumb, which is lying across the the top of 
 the cards and the first finger, which is placed at the bottom, 
 the remaining fingers of the same hand being- held loosely 
 at the same place in readiness to receive the card to be ex- 
 changed, which card is held between the second and third 
 fingers of the right hand. The hands are now brought to- 
 gether for an instant only, during which act the card in the 
 right hand is left at the bottom of the pack, being inserted 
 between the second and third fingers, while at the same 
 time the top card of the pack, which has been previously 
 pushed towards the right by means of the left thumb, is 
 quickly seized and carried away by the thumb and lower part 
 of the first finger of the right hand (Pig. 12). 
 
20 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 As already stated in the description of the Top Change, 
 there must not be the slightest lingering, while the hands 
 are placed together for that very short period of time neces- 
 
 FIG. 12. 
 
 sary to execute the change. In the same manner as the 
 "Top Change" this sleight is generally accompanied and 
 disguised by an auxiliary movement of the body from the 
 rififht towards the left. 
 
 THE NEW TOP CHANGE. 
 
 [HE PERFORMER seizes the card, say the Six of 
 Diamonds, that he is about to exchange for the top 
 card of the pack, between the thumb and fingers 
 of the right hand, holding the pack in the left 
 hand as shown in Fig. 13, the top card of the pack being 
 slightly pushed over towards the right hand by means of the 
 left thumb. 
 
 The conjurer thus first shows the Six of Diamonds to 
 the spectators sitting to his right, then to the ones directly 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 21 
 
 o^^posite him, and, finally to the persons to his left. After 
 havino- done so, he apparently places the card on the table 
 to his right, but in the act of passing the right hand over 
 
 FIG. 13. 
 
 FIG. 14. 
 
 the pack in the left, the Six of Diamonds is left on top of 
 the latter, the Ace of Hearts being noiselessly seized instead 
 and placed on the table. 
 
 K3 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 THE MBXICAW TURN OVER. 
 
 [HIS EXCELLENT and very useful sleight is so far 
 but little known in conjuring circles in this 
 country. It is, however, extensively used in Mex-- 
 ico, where professional gamblers employ it almost 
 exclusively in playing Three Card Monte. The purpose of 
 the sleight is to change a card lying on the table for one 
 held in the performer's hand. 
 
 The method of procedure is as follows: The card in the 
 right hand is held between the first and second fingers, the 
 second finger resting on the back of the card. Holding the 
 latter in this manner, at an angle of about 45 degrees, the 
 conjurer pushes its side under the card on the table, thereby 
 appearing to turn over the latter. As, however, the card in 
 the hand has reached half way under the one on the table, 
 the exchange is deftly made, the right thumb drawing up 
 the card from the table, and the fingers releasing the other 
 card instead, turning it over at the same time. 
 
 The sleight is not at all difficult to acquire, but must be 
 quickly performed, in which case the illusion will be found 
 to be an excellent one. 
 
 THE EXCELSIOR CHANGE. 
 
 HIS indetectable change, which is the invention of 
 my ingenious friend, Mr. Adrian Plate, is no doubt 
 the best of all changes that have been invented up 
 to the present day. The beauty of the sleight lies 
 in the deliberateness and apparent fairness with which it is 
 executed. 
 
 In performing it, the selected card is secretly brought 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 28 
 
 to the top of the pack, being easily retained there by means 
 of a False Shuffle. The performer with his right hand now 
 takes off the two top cards, placing the pack on the table 
 and keeping the two cards well and closely together, hold- 
 ing them lengthwise between the thumb and middle finger. 
 Exhibiting them as one card, he asks the persons whether 
 this is his card, the answer of course being in the negative, 
 the person only seeing the face of the bottom card, behind 
 w^hich the selected one is hidden. 
 
 The conjurer now pretends to transfer the card to the 
 
 FIG, 15. 
 
 left hand, but this is what he really does: He moves the 
 right hand over towards the left, the thumb of this hand be- 
 ing placed on the top card and the fingers on the bottom one. 
 Now, by means of the thumb, the top card, that is, the se- 
 lected one, is drawn into the left hand, while under cover of 
 this, the lower card is pushed into the right hand and 
 palmed there (Fig, 15). 
 
 The palming of this card is materially assisted by the 
 middle finger of the left hand, which pushes the card into 
 the palm of the right. To conceal the palmed card, the 
 wand is picked up with the right hand, or the pack is seized 
 with it, the palmed card being thereby left on its top. 
 
24 ^ NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 If these movements, which are not nearly as complicated 
 as they appear to be, are executed in a natural and deliber- 
 ate manner, the deception created will be as perfect a one as 
 the performer desires. 
 
 THE COL OB CHANGE. 
 
 HE Color Change is a novel and illusive sleight, by 
 the aid of which the front card of the pack, which 
 is held in the right hand, is mysteriously trans- 
 formed into another card, generally a selected one. 
 This change takes place under cover of the left hand, which 
 is shown to be empty prior to being placed over the cards, 
 and also after the transformation has taken place. 
 
 FIG. 16. 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 The pack is held in a perpendicular position between 
 the thumb and middle finger of the right hand, as indicated 
 in Fig. 16. The fingers of the left hand are, for a moment 
 only, placed over the cards, the thumb resting on the back 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 25 
 
 of the pack. As this hand is taken away with a shght down- 
 ward movement, the rear card of the pack is carried along 
 with it, (Fig. 17) being clipped between the root of the thumb 
 and that of the first finger. 
 
 FIG. 17. 
 
 As the front card of the pack is still in its place, no one 
 will attach any suspicion to this movement, which practically 
 resembles an indicatory gesture. The /left hand is then, a 
 moment later, replaced on the pack and this time leaves the 
 palmed card on the top of the latter. The hand is then re- 
 moved and the transformation of the front card is seen to 
 have taken placa 
 
 SECOND METHOD, 
 
 This is a variation of, or, rather an improvement on the 
 last sleight, as in this method the pack is held in a more 
 natural and easy manner, as shown in Pig. 18. It will be 
 noticed that instead of being held perpendicularly, the posi- 
 
26 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 tion of the pack in this case is almost a horizontal one. As 
 the right hand, which has previously been shown empty, 
 passes over the pack with an upward movement, it seizes 
 
 FIG. 18. 
 
 FIG. 19. 
 
 and carries away the rear card of the pack, clipping it be- 
 tween the root of the thumb and first finger (Fig. 19). The 
 hand is then replaced on the pack and the palmed card left 
 there. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 27 
 
 THIRD METHOD. 
 
 In this version of the Color Change, the pack is held in 
 a horizontal position in the left hand, the thumb of the lat- 
 ter being kept at one side of the pack, the first finger on the 
 back and the remaining fingers at the other side of the cards. 
 
 The right hand now covers the pack, for a moment only, 
 or more properly speaking, passes over it. Under cover of 
 this movement, the first finger of the left hand pushes the 
 rear card of the pack forward, it being received and palmed 
 
 FIG. 20. 
 by the right hand during its transit. The execution of the 
 sleight will be facilitated if the tip of the first finger of the 
 left hand is slightly moistened previous to the trick. Fig. 
 20 gives a rear view of the operation. The act of passing 
 the right hand, which has previously been shown empty, 
 across the pack, must be made to appear a gesture of no par- 
 ticular importance. 
 
 The hand in which the card is placed is then replaced 
 upon the pack a moment later and the card left on the top, 
 after which process the change is exhibited, 
 
 FOURTH METHOD. 
 
 Here we have an entirely different manner of accom- 
 plishing the Color Change. . . In this method, one hand only, 
 
28 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 which holds the pack, is used. While every one is looking 
 at the front card of the latter, it is seen to suddenly trans- 
 form itself into an entirely different one. 
 
 The pack is firmly held in the left hand, between the root 
 
 FIG. 21. 
 
 FIG. 22. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 29 
 
 of the thumb and the first joints of the first and second fin- 
 gers (Fig. 21). The thumb then pushes the first card, the Five 
 of Clubs, upwards about one and a half inches, pulls it over 
 towards the left side, and then slips the card on the back of 
 the pack, where it is held clipped between the first joint of 
 the thumb and the lower joint of the first finger (Fig. 22). 
 The operation is generally covered by a rapid rotary gesture 
 of the hand. 
 
 Besides being very useful in effecting a visible change 
 of a card, this sleight may be employed to excellent advan- 
 tage in making a sort of a slip pass, whereby the top card 
 of the pack, the back of which is turned towards the spec- 
 tators, is transferred to the bottom without their being 
 aware of the fact. 
 
 THE CARD PALM. 
 
 ^Y THE Card Palm is understood the method of 
 secretely removing one or more cards from the top 
 of the pack and holding them concealed on the 
 hand. 
 
 THE REGULAR PALM. 
 
 [O SECRETLY obtain possession of a selected. card 
 which has been brought to the top of the pack by 
 means of the pass, the following course is usually 
 adopted: The pack is held in the left hand, the 
 back of the cards, of course, being uppermost. The right 
 hand is then placed lengthwise over the pack, while at the 
 
30 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 same time the left thumb pushes the top card of the pack 
 over into the right, which seizes the card and is then partly 
 closed just enough to give it a natural appearance. Fig. 23 
 shows the manner in which the card is held, resting against 
 the slightly bent first joints of the second and third fingers 
 and the root of the thumb. 
 
 The right hand is now carelessly dropped to the side, 
 or placed on the hip, while with the left the pack is handed 
 to a spectator with the request to shuffte it. A still better, 
 but much bolder plan, is to seize the pack with the same 
 hand in which the card is concealed and in this fashion hand 
 it out to be shuffled, the left hand being casually shown emp- 
 
 FIG. 23. 
 
 ty during the maneuver. The proper way in which to hold 
 the pack for this purpose, is to grasp it between the first 
 joint of the thumb and the lower joint of the first finger of 
 the right hand, the inside of which is turned toward the 
 floor. Care must be taken to hold the fingers of this hand 
 closely together, so that the spectator, to whom the pack is 
 given, cannot get a glimpse of an accidentally exposed part of 
 the palmed card. When the pack has been returned to the 
 conjurer, the latter receives it with the left hand and care- 
 lessly passing the right hand over it, leaves the palmed card 
 on the top. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 31 
 
 Most performers have a habit of ruffling the pack just 
 after the palmed card has been replaced. I would warn the 
 reader against the acquirement of this habit, as the ruffling 
 generally conveys the impression that some subtle sleight is 
 taking place, or that it has already been executed, being dis- 
 guised by the Ruffle. 
 
 It is my opinion that a performer of artistic inclinations 
 ought to appear to manipulate the cards in as natural a way 
 as any other gentleman, who is not a conjurer, would do. 
 All flourishes, as palming off part of the pack and reproduc- 
 ing it, making single handed passes to show off one's dex- 
 terity, etc., ought to be studiously avoided, as they only 
 tend to create the impression that the conjurer is past mas- 
 ter in the art of handling the pasteboards. Once this last 
 named impression has been made, the spectator will readily 
 conclude, after seeing the artist perform some difficult and 
 intricate card tricks, that it is no wonder such marvelous 
 results can be attained when one can manipulate the cards 
 as dexterously as the conjurer did a while ago. Thus the 
 effect of the trick proper is greatly impaired by the injudi- 
 cious introduction of superfluous sleights which precede it. 
 
 THE BEAVTIEB BALM. 
 
 IHIS sleight, which, to the best of my knowledge 
 is the invention of Mr. Buatier Dekolta, is a vast 
 improvement over the palm just described, as in 
 this case the pack is never touched with the right 
 hand at all. The pack is held in the left hand, the cards to 
 be palmed being divided off from the rest of the pack by the 
 little finger, which is inserted there. They are kept down 
 on the pack proper by pressure of the remaining fingers. 
 As the right hand, under any plausible pretext, passes over 
 the left, the pressure of the fingers ceases, while at the same 
 
32 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 time the little finder tilts the first card lying above it up- 
 wards, the cards being thereby rapidly and invisibly pro- 
 pelled into the right hand, which instantly palms them. 
 
 THE BACK HAND JPALM. 
 
 IHE SLEIGHT, or rather flourish, of this title has of 
 late years become quite popular with the conjurers 
 of this country, some of whom have attained a 
 wonderful proficiency in performing it, having 
 elaborated the original idea considerably. Foremost among 
 these are my friends Mr. Elliott, who, I believe, is the orig- 
 inator of the move, and Mr. Harry Houdini, another very 
 
 FIG. 24. 
 
 dextrous card manipulator. I shall give a full description 
 of the sleight proper, but can only treat the elaborations in 
 brief for the simple reason that, on account of their great 
 difficulty, they would be appreciated by a select few only. As 
 the name of the sleight indicates, one or more cards are 
 palmed, or rather, kept concealed on the back of the hand, 
 being transferred to there from the front of the hand. The 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 38 
 
 card is first seized between the thumb and first finger of the 
 right (or left) hand, the inside of which is turned towards 
 the audience. From this place it is transferred to the posi- 
 tion shown in Fig. 24, being held between the first and 
 fourth fingers, its lower end being bent into a convex form 
 
 •FIG. 25. 
 
 as indicated in the illustration. The second and third lin- 
 gers, which have remained passive up to this moment, now 
 curl under the lower edge of the card (Fig. 25. ) and twirl it 
 over to the back of the hand, where it is held as shown in 
 Fig. 26. By reversing the process, the card is made to ap- 
 pear at the finger tips. 
 
 My readers will of course understand that, as the execu- 
 tion of the sleight takes but a moment, the four different 
 stages, or moves, are practically made to form one com- 
 pound movement only. 
 
 The improvements of this sleight consist of being able 
 to show the hand empty from both sides and still have the 
 card palmed anyway. In the act of turning over the hand, 
 in order to show that the card is not concealed on its back, it 
 is removed from there, and by a very adroit process, which 
 is almost impossible to describe, is brought back to the in- 
 side of the hand, where it is palmed by clipping its upper 
 corners between the first and second and the third and 
 
34 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 fourth fingers respectively. From this position it is instant- 
 ly transferred once more to the back of the hand. 
 
 By dint of considerable practice, the two performers 
 that I have mentioned in the beginning of this article, are en- 
 
 FIG. 26. 
 
 abled to palm a number of cards in this fashion, then produce 
 one card after another at the finger tips, still showing both 
 sides of the hands empty at any stage of the trick. 
 
 WEW THOUGHT CABD SLEIGHTS. 
 
 |N DESCRIBING the following entirely new methods of 
 discovering the name of a card, that a spectator has 
 secretly thought of, I take great pleasure in making 
 my readers acquainted with some of the most interest- 
 ing and indetectable sleights in the whole range of con- 
 juring. All these methods are the sole invention of my 
 very ingenious friend, Mr. Wm. E. Robinson. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 35 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 ^N THIS form of the trick, the performer takes a pack 
 of cards that has just been shuffled by a spectator and 
 holding the cards, of the order of which he has abso- 
 lutely no knowledge, in the right hand, with the backs 
 of the cards towards himself, passes them one at a time into 
 the left hand, at the same time requesting a spectator to 
 think of any card that he desires. After the person has 
 signified that he has made a selection, the performer closes 
 up the pack and gives it a thorough shuffle. He now fin- 
 ishes the trick in any manner that he chooses, producing, for 
 instance, the thought card at any number called for, or 
 causing any card that some one else selects at random from 
 the pack, to change into the thought card. 
 
 The secret of this entirely new dodge, depends practi- 
 cally upon a novel application of the Mind Reading Act, a 
 la Bishop and Cumberland. As the performer deliberately 
 passes the cards from the right hand to the left, he counts 
 them, at the same time carefully watching the eyes of the 
 spectator, to whom he is rather close. It is a curious fact, 
 that as soon as the latter has made a silent choice, his eyes 
 will give a recognition of that fact by the glance losing its 
 intensity. The conjurer can thus invariably tell which card 
 has been selected, and having kept tally on the number of 
 cards passed, knows its exact position in the pack. It is a 
 comparatively easy matter for him to make the pass at this 
 place, thereby bringing the desired card to the top of the 
 pack, which is next subjected to a vigorous but false shuffle. 
 The finish of the trick, which is optional with the performer, 
 ought to be made as brilliant a one as possible. 
 
 The conjurer employing this plan of discovering a card 
 secretly thought of, is apt to be suspected of being in league 
 with his Satanic majesty, for he takes an unprepared pack of 
 cards that has just been shuffled, and without as much as 
 glancing at one of the cards, places the pack behind his 
 back which he turns towards the spectators. Passing the 
 cards from one hand to the other, he invites a spectator to 
 
36 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 think of one of them; then closing up the pack, and after 
 shuffling it, produces the selected card in any way that he 
 sees fit. 
 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 
 This method, which is entirely different in principle to 
 the preceding one, depends mainly upon a novel way of 
 forcing a card. As the conjurer rather rapidly passes the 
 cards from one hand into the other, he keeps the attention 
 of the spectator engaged by about the following remark: 
 "Now, sir, as I pass these cards from one hand into the 
 other in this fashion, please have the kindness to think of 
 one of the cards. " The moment that he exclaims "think,** 
 he stops for an instant only, fully exposing the face of the 
 card that he is about to transfer, then actually placing it in 
 the other hand and passing the remaining cards in quick 
 succession on top of it. The person will, in almost every 
 case select the card that the performer has made a brief 
 stop at, for the very simple reason that he did not know to 
 a certainty what the conjurer wished him to do until the 
 latter came to the word "think," of the short sentence he 
 uttered. It is also almost impossible for him to select any 
 of the cards that follow the one that the performer intends 
 to force, because they are intentionally passed too quickly 
 before his eyes. 
 
 The artist, who has slipped the little finger of the left 
 hand above the forced card while transferring it to the other 
 hand, closes up the pack, and in the act of turning around, 
 makes the pass, thereby bringing the card to the top of the 
 I)ack. Palming off this card, he allows the jjack to be thor- 
 oughly shuffted, replacing the palmed card after it has been 
 returned to him and then finishes the trick in any way he 
 chooses. 
 
 THIRD METHOD. 
 
 The ruse employed in this version of the feat is really 
 as ingenious as the preceding one. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 37 
 
 The performer advances towards a spectator and, hold- 
 ing the pack with the faces of the cards towards himself, 
 causes them to spring from one hand to the other in the 
 manner familiar to all conjurers. At the same time, he re- 
 quests a spectator to think of any one of the cards that he 
 sees. The gentleman does as requested and is very much 
 surprised, when a few moments later the conjurer produces, 
 in some mysterious manner, the card that he actually se- 
 lected. 
 
 In this case another novel force, resembling in principle 
 the preceding one, is used. It is practically impossible for 
 the spectator to note, in particular, any of the cards as they 
 are sprung from one hand to the other, for the very reason 
 that they pass before his eye in too quick a succession to 
 each other. When about half of the cards have been 
 sprung, the performer stops for an instant, say a quarter of 
 a second, thereby causing an extremely brief cessation of 
 the springing and thus causing the last card that has been 
 sprung to be more fully exposed than any of the others. 
 The spectator readily grasps the chance offered to him and 
 selects this card which the performer, who quickly places 
 his little finger over it, sees as well as he. The rest of the 
 cards are then sprung on top of the other ones in the usual 
 fashion, whereupon the pack is closed and the pass made 
 whereby the chosen card is brought to the top of the pack, 
 the performer then dealing with it as best suits the occasion. 
 
 THE NEW GLIMPSE. 
 
 I^Y THE Glimpse is understood the very advantag- 
 eous sleight of secretly getting sight of a selected 
 card which has been replaced in the pack, or of a 
 card preparatory to forcing it. 
 
38 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 prpN THIS, the regular form of the sleight, the little fin- 
 wM^ ger of the left hand is inserted below the chosen card, 
 while the latter is being returned to the pack, the re- 
 maining fingers of the same hand resting on the top 
 of the cards. In the act of handing the pack to a spectator 
 to shuffle, the performer slightly raises the upper one of the 
 two packets and thus obtains a rapid glimpse of the lowest 
 card in the upper heap, which card is the selected one. The 
 spectators may now shuffle the cards as long as they may 
 desire, without incommoding the conjurer, who, knowing the 
 name of the card chosen, is enabled to discover it with the 
 greatest ease. 
 
 SECOND METHOD * 
 
 This method of getting a glimpse of a card will prove 
 of great advantage in any trick where it is necessary to 
 force a card for the sole reason of being able to have the 
 pack shuffled, after the forced card has been replaced in the 
 pack, which is generally handed to the spectator for this 
 purpose. This sleight does away with the usual forcing of 
 the bottom card of the pack, which card the performer has 
 previously noted. The objection to the last mode is that a 
 sharp spectator may also have seen this particular card, and 
 noting that the selected card is identical with the former 
 bottom card of the pack, thus obtains a partial clue to the 
 modus operandi. 
 
 In order to execute the slight, the performer holds the 
 pack in the first position necessary for the making of the 
 Charlier Pass, only more perpendicularly. In the act of 
 advancing toward a certain spectator, he allows the lower 
 half of the pack to drop down (or to second position of the 
 Charlier pass) and is thus afforded a rapid glimpse of the 
 bottom card of the upper heap, which is instantly dropped 
 back on the lower packet, a step being, however, formed by 
 the two, enabling the conjurer to tell the joint of division of 
 the two packets. The pack is then spread out in the usual 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 39 
 
 fashion and the card that the performer got sight of, is forced 
 without the least trouble. 
 
 It must be understood that it takes but a fraction of a 
 second in which to accomplish the entire sleight, which, if 
 adroitly performed, is practically unnoticeable. 
 
 THIRD METHOD 
 
 This very natural way of obtaining a glimpse of a select- 
 ed card, is in many ways to be preferred to all others. The 
 performer holds the pack in the left hand, the thumb lying 
 across the back of the cards, the fingers being kept at the 
 opposite side of the pack. The right hand then seizes the 
 top edge of the latter and bending the cards backwards, al- 
 lows them to escape in rotation, thus making practically a 
 Ruffle. The person holding the selected card is invited to 
 insert it into the pack during the ruf&e. He does so, but 
 will find it impossible to push the card all the way home, 
 the card protruding about a quarter of an inch. The per- 
 former continues until all the cards have been ruffled and 
 then transfers the pack to the left hand, the right turning it 
 over during the transit, thus allowing him to obtain a 
 glimpse of the protruding upper portion of the selected 
 card. The indicator printed in the left corner of the latter 
 instantly betrays to him the name of. the card. With the 
 right hand, the pack is then given to a spectator with the 
 request to shuffle it thoroughly, 
 
 A somewhat" similar sleight is the following one, in 
 which the conjurer obtains sight of the card above the se- 
 lected one, being enabled to pick out the latter later on by 
 the aid of this knowledge. For this purpose he proceeds in 
 exactly the same manner as described, holding the pack, 
 back uppermost, in the left hand and ruffling the cards with 
 the right, bending them well backwards so that he can just 
 see the indicator of each card as it passes. The selected 
 card is now inserted into any place of the pack that the-gen- 
 tleman fancies, the pejformer noting carefully the indicator 
 of the next card above it, thus becoming, to all intents and 
 
40 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 purposes, acquainted with the name of the chosen card 
 itself. 
 
 ¥ 
 
 THE BRIDGE 
 
 .MBLERS use the bridge extensively in causing 
 their opponent to cut the cards at a certain place 
 desired by the operator, whereas in conjuring, the 
 bridge serves principally to discover by its aid, a 
 selected card which has been replaced and shuffled into the 
 pack by the spectators themselves. 
 
 As this result cannot be attained by any other method, 
 unless prepared cards are used, the usefulness of the sleight 
 will readily be perceived. Holding the pack in the left hand, 
 the thumb resting across the back of the cards, the per- 
 former seizes the upper and lower ends of the pack and 
 gives the cards a sharp bend towards himself. A spectator 
 is then invited to chose any card that he desires and told to 
 look at it closely so that he will be sure to recognize it. 
 
 While he does so, the conjurer gives the pack another 
 bend, this time in the opposite direction to the first bend. 
 The pack is then handed to the spectator with the request to 
 replace his card and after shuffling the pack thoroughly, 
 to return it to the performer. As soon as the latter receives 
 the pack, he holds it rather loosely and will now find that 
 owing to the different curve of the selected card, the pack 
 will open itself at the very spot where this card is located. 
 It is an easy matter for him to insert the little finger at this 
 place, then making the pass and bringing the selected card 
 to the top of the pack, after which he proceeds with the 
 trick in any manner that he desires. 
 
 CS3 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 41 
 
 THE PREABBANGED PACK. 
 
 IS THE title indicates, the cards contained in the 
 pack are, previous to the performance, placed in 
 a certain regular order which the performer knows 
 by heart. To facilitate the memorizing and recall- 
 ing of this order, a sort of formula or artificial aid to mem- 
 ory is generally employed, the most popular one being the 
 following: 
 
 Eight kings threatened to save. 
 
 Eight, King, Three, Ten, Two, Seven, 
 Ninety-five queens for one sick knave. 
 
 Nine, Five, Queen, Four, One, Six, Knave. 
 
 The words of this verse suggest, as will be observed, 
 the values of the cards printed below them. The performer 
 must also have a regular order of the four suits, as, for in- 
 stance: Hearts, Clubs, Diamonds, Spades. Thus, the first 
 cards of the prearranged pack would be: Eight of Hearts, 
 King of Clubs, Three of Diamonds, Ten of Spades, Two of 
 of Hearts, Seven of Clubs, etc., the last card being the 
 Knave or Jack of Spades. 
 
 A number of capital tricks explained in this book, de- 
 pend exclusively upon the use of the prearranged pack. 
 When the reader, who is advised to get up a formula of his 
 own, arrives at the description of these tricks, he will 
 readily observe the many ways in which the prearranged 
 pack may be employed to good advantage. 
 
42 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 THE GLIDE. 
 
 IHE GLIDE is a simple but useful form of the 
 Change, whereby the bottom card of the pack is 
 apparently removed and placed on the table, the 
 performer however taking the second card from 
 the bottom instead. 
 
 He first holds the pack in a perpendicular position, thus 
 exhibiting the bottom card. The hand is then lowered to a 
 horizontal position, whereupon the bottom card is apparent- 
 
 FIG. z7. 
 
 ly removed. What really takes place is that, by means of 
 the previously moistened third finger, the lowest card is 
 drawn toward the performer for about an inch and the next 
 card, in our illustration (Fig. 27) the Six of Clubs, is taken 
 instead and placed on the table. 
 
 KJ 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 43 
 
 THB BEVOLVTION. 
 
 iN THIS sleight, which is mostly used as a finale to a 
 card trick, the pack, which is held face downwards, is 
 I then dropped on the floor or table, whereby a card, us- 
 ually a selected one, appears at the top of the pack, 
 reversing itself during this operation so that it now lies face 
 uppermost. 
 
 The selected card is first brought to the top of the pack 
 by means of the pass, being retained in this position by a 
 False Shuffle. The performer then transfers the pack from 
 the left hand to the right, during this act pushing the top 
 card of the pack over toward the right by means of the 
 left thumb. The right hand now, with some force, drops 
 the pack on the table from a height of about two feet. The 
 pressure of the air, acting on the protruding portion of the 
 top card, causes the latter to turn over so that it now lies 
 face upwards. 
 
 There are several novel tricks which depend altogether 
 on this sleight. One of them is the following: 
 
 A card is chosen and placed on the table by the per- 
 former, who then drops the pack upon the chosen card, 
 which apparently jumps to- the top of the pack, turning face 
 upwards during this evolution. 
 
 This rather neat trick depends upon the clever execu- 
 of the Top Change and the Revolution. After the chosen 
 card has been exhibited, the performer changes it for an- 
 other card by means of the Top Change, then placing the 
 substitute on the table. Getting the pack into the position 
 necesssary for the Revolution, he drops it directly on the 
 card on the table, causing the upper card, which is really 
 the selected one, to turn over. 
 
 In the second trick, the chosen card, after the False 
 Shuffle, is left the second one from the top of the pack. The 
 latter is then dropped on the table, the uppermost card be- 
 ing made to turn over. The performer asks if this is the 
 desired card and appears to be surprised at learning that 
 
44 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 such is not the case. He then states that having committed 
 this error, he will try to remedy it by causing the wrong 
 card to visibly change into the chosen one. For this pur- 
 pose, he removes the top card, carrying with and hidden be- 
 hind it, the selected card. Both cards, which the audience 
 believes to be one, are replaced in their original position on 
 the top of the pack, being allowed to protrude a little at one 
 side of the latter. The pack is now rather vehemently 
 thrown on the table, thereby causing both top cards to turn 
 over, the wrong card thus visibly changing into the right one. 
 
 I 
 
 FALSE SHUFFLBS. 
 
 UHALSE Shuffles are of two kinds, the object of one 
 ^'^A being to keep in view one or several cards only, 
 while the remainder of the pack is given a genuine 
 shuffle. By means of the other False Shuffle the 
 entire pack, which is generally prearranged, is kept in the 
 same order throughout. The various methods by which this 
 latter result may be accomplished will be described first. 
 
 THE CUT. 
 
 |HE simplest form of the False Shuffle is the cutting 
 of the pack in whist fashion, by taking off the 
 upper half of the pack, placing it on the table and 
 placing the lower half of the pack on top of it. 
 By this process the cards are only cut, but not shuffled, for 
 when the former bottom card is found and all card below it 
 are placed on top of the pack, the latter will be restored to 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 45 
 
 its original order. As well known as this fact is among con- 
 jurers, it is astonishing how little the general public is ac- 
 quainted with it. 
 
 In order to thoroughly deceive even the persons that 
 are acquainted with this principle of the simple cut, the 
 modern conjurer divides the pack into either three, four or 
 five heaps, which he places together in such an irregular 
 order that one who has not actually tried the same process, 
 will be positive that the cards have become hopelessly 
 mixed. As this is, however, not the conjurer's intention, I 
 hasten to make my reader acquainted withe the modus op- 
 erandU so that he can go and do likewise. Supposing that 
 the pack has been divided into three heaps, which we will 
 call A, B and C, and which are placed on the table as follows : 
 
 A. B. C. 
 
 Lower Heap. Middle Heap. Upper Heap. 
 
 Heap A is placed on C, and B on A and C, which process 
 will be found to preserve the original order of the cards. 
 For four heaps: 
 
 A. B. C. D. 
 
 Lower Heap. Second Heap. Third Heap. Upper Heap. 
 
 C. is placed on B, A on D, CB on AD; or, A on D, B on 
 AD, BAD on C. 
 
 For five or more heaps: 
 
 The Pack is placed on the table at A, a few cards are 
 taken from the top and are placed at B; a few more are taken 
 from A and placed at C, the same process being repeated 
 with D and E. A is then quickly placed on B, B on C, C on 
 D, and D. on E. If these ingenious and very useful methods 
 of cutting have been well practised and can be performed 
 rapidly, both hands being used at the same time, the con- 
 jurer may be sure that there isn't the slightest doubt in the 
 minds of his spectators, that the pack has not been thor- 
 oughly shuffled. 
 
46 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 SHUFFLING THE FNTIRF PACK. 
 
 |S THIS method of apparently shuffling the entire 
 pack is by far the best of all existing False Shuf- 
 fles, the beginner need not trouble himself with 
 learning any other method, as this one and a ju- 
 dicious combination of the various trick Cuts, will answer 
 for all occasions. 
 
 The prearranged cards, the order of which the conjurer 
 does not wish to disturb by shuffling, are held in the left 
 hand, the thumb of which begins the false shuffle by push- 
 ing a number of cards, which we will call A, into the right 
 hand. Now, from the bottom of the pack remaining in the 
 left hand which we will call B, a number of cards are passed 
 upon the top of A. A few cards from the top of B are then 
 transferred to the bottom of A, the performer continuing in 
 this manner until all the cards have been successively passed 
 from the left into the right hand. If desired this apparent 
 shuffle may be repeated a few times. If it is smoothly and 
 rapidly executed, the illusion will be found to be all that can 
 be desired. 
 
 m 
 
 FOB ONE CARD. 
 
 |N THIS method, one particular card only, is to be kept 
 in view, said card having been brought to the top by 
 means of the pass. The pack is then taken in the 
 "^ left hand, the thumb of which rests on the back of 
 cards while the fingers are placed underneath. Exercising 
 a slight pressure with the thumb on the top card, the per- 
 former seizes the pack with the right hand and lifts off all 
 cards excepting the top one which is thereby brought to the 
 bottom, the cards held in the right hand being then promis- 
 cuously shuffled on top of it. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 47 
 
 Taking the entire pack in the right, he shuffles it back 
 into the left hand, dropping of the cards in heaps from the 
 top of the pack, continuing to do so until the last card, 
 which is the desired one, is reached, which is then placed in 
 its former position on the top of the pack. If two cards 
 are to be kept in view, one of them is made to- occupy the 
 bottom and the other the top of the pack, which as before 
 is held in the same position in the left hand. Slightly pressing 
 with the fingers and the thumb of the left at the same time, 
 the right hand lifts up the pack with the exception of the 
 top and bottom cards. The top card is thereby brought 
 directly over the bottom one, and the remainder of the pack 
 is now^ shuffled indiscriminately on top of both. The right 
 hand then lifts up the entire pack with the exception of the 
 bottom card and shuffles the pack on top of it, passing the 
 card in small heaps from the top of the pack, until the last 
 card is reached. It will be found, that by means of this 
 process, both the bottom and the top card, have returned 
 to their original place. 
 
 Another simple, and little known plan is to have the de- 
 sired card on the top of the pack, which is then divided into 
 two equal parts, which are then sprung or "riffled'* into each 
 other in the well known manner adopted by most card 
 players in this country. It will be found a very easy matter 
 to retain the top card or cards in their respective places, as 
 the "riffle" need only affect the middle and lower part of 
 both heaps. 
 
48 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 Triek^ Witl( C^td^. 
 
 NE PLUS ULTRA. 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 [HE spectators are requested to examine and shuf- 
 fle an ordinary pack of cards, the performer retir- 
 ing to a sufficient distance to be prevented from see- 
 ing what is taking place. At his request the specta- 
 tors select at random ^ny number of cards, say seven from the 
 pack, and write down their names on a slip of paper, which 
 one of their number folds up and places in his pocket. The 
 selected cards are placed face downwards, on the table in 
 a separate heap, by the side of the pack which is also turn- 
 ed face downward. When affairs have reached this stage, 
 the performer advances and asks a gentleman to replace the 
 seven selected cards on the top of the pack and then to cut 
 the latter, whist fashion, that is, give the cards a single cut, 
 the other surrounding spectators being also invited to cut 
 the cards in this manner. This having been done, the per- 
 former seizes the pack and taking off the four top cards, 
 but without disturbing their order, places them on the table 
 on the spot indicated by A. the next four top cards are 
 placed at B. the next at C. and four at D. also. He then 
 recommences at A. by placing four cards on top of the those 
 already there, and continues in this manner until there are 
 twelve cards each in heaps A, B, C, and D. Fouic cards are 
 still remaining in his hands. These he disposes of by plac- 
 
^>^^o/^y/^r^ ,0m^ 
 
 Three of the Principal Card Conjurers of America. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 49 
 
 ing the topmost one on top of heap A, the next on B, and 
 the remaining ones on C and D: 
 
 C B 
 
 D A 
 
 He now picks up A, then B, which he places on top of 
 A in his hand. On this he places C, and on top of this, D. 
 Again the cards are dpalt in four heaps, but in this case 
 only one card at a time is placed successivly on A, B, C 
 and D, so that the performer is obliged to make this round 
 thirteen times, when all the cards are evenly distributed. 
 They are then picked up in the same fashion as already 
 described, i. e. , B, on A, C on B, and D on C. 
 
 Once more they are dealt out as indicated in the follow- 
 ing table No. 1, by placing the topmost card, which we will 
 call No. 1, in the upper right hand corner and dealing the 
 next six top cards towards the left. In placing the second 
 row of cards, he commences at the right side at the spot in- 
 dicated by 8. He proceeds in this manner until he has laid 
 out the cards, face downwards, in seven rows of seven cards 
 each, which process leaves three cards remaining in his 
 hands; these he places at 50, 51 and 52. 
 
 
 
 TABLE NO. 
 
 1. 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 14 
 
 IB 
 
 12 
 
 11 
 
 10 
 
 9 
 
 8 
 
 21 
 
 20 
 
 19 
 
 18 
 
 17 
 
 16 
 
 15 
 
 28 
 
 27 
 
 26 
 
 25 
 
 24 
 
 23 
 
 22 
 
 35 
 
 34 
 
 33 
 
 32 
 
 31 
 
 30 
 
 29 
 
 42 
 
 41 
 
 40 
 
 39 
 
 38 
 
 37 
 
 36 
 
 49 
 
 48 
 
 47 
 52 
 
 46 
 51 
 
 45 
 
 50 
 
 44 
 
 43 
 
 All these preliminaries, which in actual practice occupy 
 much less time than it takes to describe them, having been 
 gone through with, the performer now slowly passes his 
 right hand to and fro over the cards, which, as will be re- 
 membered, are lying face downwards, and suddenly seizing 
 one of them, exhibits it, asking the spectator holding the 
 slip of paper, whether that is not the first one of the select- 
 
50 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 ed cards and receives a surprised answer in the affirmative. 
 The performer then proceeds to pick out the remaining six 
 cards in rapid succession to each other, calling due attention 
 to the fact that he discovers them in exactly the same order 
 in which they have been chosen. 
 
 In order not to confuse my readers, I will teach them 
 only how to perform the feat, leaving it to those who have a 
 taste for the solving of mathematical problems, to discover 
 the key to the secret! 
 
 I shall first explain the simplest method of performing 
 the feat. For this it is necessary that the conjurer should 
 secretly remove, prior to experiment, one of the cards of 
 the pack, which card he marks slightly on the back, just suf- 
 ficiently to enable him to distinguish it from the other cards. 
 While the spectators are occupied with the selection of their 
 cards, the performer palms the marked card in his right 
 hand. After the gentlemen has replaced the chosen cards 
 on the top of the pack as requested by the conjurer, the lat- 
 ter places his right hand for a moment on the pack, pushing 
 it towards the spectators and inviting them to cut the cards. 
 By the aid of this little pretext, he is enable to leave the 
 palmed, marked card on top of the pack without being ob- 
 served. 
 
 Any other suitable expedient will answer equally as well, 
 as for instance seme trivial remark pertaining to the experi- 
 ment, as long as the spectator's attention is thereby diverted 
 momentarly from the slight movement of placing the palmed 
 card on top of the selected ones. The spectators then cut 
 the pack as often as they please, after which the performer 
 deals out the cards (quadrating is the technical term for the 
 two different ways of mixing them) as already set forth. 
 
 The cards having been laid on the table in rows of seven 
 cards each, and the remaining three cards placed in a sep- 
 arate smaller row at the bottom, the real process of finding 
 the chosen cards begins. 
 
 For this it is necessary to have committed to memory 
 the following abbreviated Table No. 2, or, if the student 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 51 
 
 should find the memorizing too difficult a task, have it 
 written on a small card, which he holds openly or concealed 
 in his hand, consulting it as he proceeds with the picking 
 out of the selected cards. 
 
 TABLE NO. 2. 
 
 JS 
 
 8C 
 
 5D 
 
 10 H 
 
 lOS 
 
 7C 
 
 4D 
 
 3D 
 
 8H 
 
 5S 
 
 2C 
 
 3H 
 
 KC 
 
 10 D 
 
 9D 
 
 JH 
 
 AH 
 
 JC 
 
 8D 
 
 9S 
 
 6C 
 
 5C 
 
 2D 
 
 7H 
 
 4S 
 
 AC 
 
 2H 
 
 QC 
 
 5H 
 
 2S 
 
 QD 
 
 KS 
 
 IOC 
 
 7D 
 
 8S 
 
 7S 
 
 4C 
 
 AD 
 
 6H 
 
 3S 
 
 KD 
 
 QH 
 
 3C 
 
 4H 
 
 AS 
 
 JD 
 
 QS 
 
 9C 
 
 6D 
 
 
 
 KH 
 
 9H 
 
 6S 
 
 
 
 In placing the cards in rows, the conjurer has kept his 
 eyes open for the previously secreted, marked card and has 
 carefully noted which place it occupies. We will suppose 
 that it is card No. 12 according to Table No. 1. Consulting 
 Table No. 2, the performer finds the twelfth place on the 
 latter and sees that it is occupied by the Five of Spades. 
 This is the starting point. Knowing that according to the 
 order of the cards described in Table 3, the Six of Spades 
 follows the Five of Spades, he consults Table No. 2 and finds 
 that the Six of Spades is the first card in the small row, or 
 more properly speaking, the fiftieth card according to Table 
 No. 1. Picking up this card, he will find that it is the first 
 one of the selected cards. 
 
 Once more, referring to Table No. 3 (which of course, 
 he knows by heart), he sees that the card following the Six 
 of Spades is the Seven of Spades. Consulting Table No. 2, he 
 finds that the Seven of Spades occupies the forty second po- 
 
52 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 sition; consequently, he picks up the forty -second card on 
 the table and thus has discovered the second one of the 
 chosen cards. 
 
 
 
 
 TABLE NO 
 
 . 3. 
 
 
 1. 
 
 Ace of Diamonds. 27. 
 
 Ace of 
 
 Spades 
 
 2. 
 
 Two 
 
 28. 
 
 Two 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Three 
 
 29. 
 
 Three 
 
 
 4. 
 
 Four 
 
 30. 
 
 Four 
 
 
 5. 
 
 Five 
 
 
 31. 
 
 Five 
 
 
 6. 
 
 Six 
 
 
 32. 
 
 Six 
 
 
 7. 
 
 Seven 
 
 
 33. 
 
 Seven 
 
 
 8. 
 
 Eight 
 
 
 34. 
 
 Eight 
 
 
 9. 
 
 Nine 
 
 
 35. 
 
 Nine 
 
 
 10. 
 
 Ten 
 
 
 36. 
 
 Ten 
 
 
 11. 
 
 Jack 
 
 37. 
 
 Jack 
 
 
 12. 
 
 Queen 
 
 38. 
 
 Queen 
 
 
 13. 
 
 King 
 
 39. 
 
 King 
 
 
 14. 
 
 Ace of Clu 
 
 bs. 40. 
 
 Ace of 
 
 Hearts. 
 
 15. 
 
 Two 
 
 41. 
 
 Two 
 
 
 16. 
 
 Three 
 
 42. 
 
 Three 
 
 
 17. 
 
 Four 't 
 
 43. 
 
 Four 
 
 
 18. 
 
 Five 
 
 44. 
 
 Five 
 
 
 19. 
 
 Six 
 
 45. 
 
 Six 
 
 
 20. 
 
 Seven " 
 
 46. 
 
 Seven 
 
 
 21. 
 
 Eight 
 
 47. 
 
 Eight 
 
 
 22. 
 
 Nine ' ' 
 
 48. 
 
 Nine 
 
 
 23: 
 
 Ten 
 
 49. 
 
 Ten 
 
 
 24. 
 
 Jack ' ' 
 
 50. 
 
 Jack 
 
 
 25. 
 
 Queen '' 
 
 51. 
 
 Queen 
 
 
 26. 
 
 King 
 
 i I 
 
 52. 
 
 King 
 
 
 The next card that he looks for in Table No. 2, is the 
 Eight of Spades, which lies in the twenty- ninth plaec. 
 Therefore, the twenty-ninth card of the ones lying on the 
 table must be the next card wanted. 
 
 The fourth card in this same case would be the sixteenth, 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 53 
 
 the fifth (the Ten of Spades) the third, the sixth, the 
 seventh and the last, or the seventh card, the forty- fifth 
 one on the table. 
 
 Another example: 
 
 Supposing that after the cards have been laid in rows 
 upon the table, the marked card occupies the twenty -fifth 
 place, (according to Table No. 1) the performer sees that the 
 twenty-fifth card in Table No. 2 is the Four of Spades which 
 is his starting card. According to the rotation of cards in 
 Table No. 3, the Four of SpadBs is followed by the Five of 
 Spades, which is the twelfth card in Table No. 2, and, 
 consequently, also the twelfth card on the table. This is 
 the first one of the chosen cards, the next card, the* Six 
 of Spades, the fiftieth card, is the second selected card; the 
 forty- second, the third one,- and so forth, according to the 
 number of cards selected. 
 
 Last example: 
 
 The marked card occupies the fourth place on the table. 
 The fourth card in Table No. 2 is the Ten of Hearts, which 
 is the starting point. The Ten of Hearts is followed by the 
 Jack of Hearts, which, according to Table No. 2, is the 
 twentieth card; consequently, the twentieth card on the 
 table is the first chosen card, the thirty- sixth card is the 
 second one, the fifty- second, or last, the third, etc. 
 
 For the benefit of those who wish to make the cards 
 appear to be still more hopelessly mixed, I append a key, or 
 table, which is used when the cards are quadrated (shuffled) 
 twice instead of once, as in the preceding method. 
 
 Other keys can easily be constructed by laying the cards 
 in the order shown in Table No. 3, and without cutting them, 
 quadrating them as many times as the performer intends to 
 quadrate the regular pack afterwards. When the cards are 
 then placed, face upwards, in eight rows, their order is 
 copied, the desired key being thus obtained. In the preced- 
 ing tables, instead of the full name of the cards, abbrevia- 
 tions as H, C, D, S, are used for the suits, numbers for the values 
 of the spot cards and the letters J, Q, K, for the three picture 
 
54 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 card. Thus K D signifies the King of Diamonds, 2 S 
 the Two of Spades, etc. 
 
 TABLE NO. 4. 
 
 KD 
 
 9D 
 
 5D 
 
 SC 
 
 QH 
 
 JH 
 
 lOH 
 
 lOS 
 
 ,AS 
 
 IOC 
 
 6C 
 
 7S 
 
 7H 
 
 3H 
 
 KC 
 
 6S 
 
 AD 
 
 AC 
 
 lOD 
 
 5H 
 
 AH 
 
 JC 
 
 7C 
 
 JD 
 
 7D 
 
 3D 
 
 4C 
 
 4S 
 
 9C 
 
 5C 
 
 r)S 
 
 6H 
 
 2H 
 
 JS 
 
 2S 
 
 QD 
 
 8D 
 
 4D 
 
 QS 
 
 8S 
 
 8H 
 
 9H 
 
 9S 
 
 6D 
 
 2D 
 
 2C 
 
 3S 
 
 QC 
 
 8C 
 
 
 
 KH 
 
 4H 
 
 KS 
 
 
 
 After my intelligent reader has mastered the simple 
 rules governing this most interesting and absolutely in- 
 detectable feat, he can then embellish it according to his 
 fancy and by the use of a few additional dodges, obtain an 
 almost marvelous result. Thus, the secreted, palmed card 
 may be dispensed with, the performer picking up the pack 
 for a moment and bending one corner of the bottom card, 
 which will later on serve as a starting point, in the same 
 way as the marked top card did. 
 
 Another still better way is to use a pack with a marked 
 printed back (obtainable at all magical repositories) in 
 which case the performer only has T;0 note the top card of 
 the selected ones, which he afterwards easily discovers 
 among the others. He can even invite a spectator to do all 
 the quadrating and laying out, so that he need never touch 
 the cards during the entire experiment, on which point, of 
 course, he lays great stress. I also suggest the blindfolding 
 of the conjurer by means of a borrowed handkerchief, it be- 
 ing a well known fact among magicians and second sight 
 artists, that a person may seemingly be securely blindfolded 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRiCKS. 55 
 
 and still be able to see out from under the handkerchief, 
 provided the latter has been folded into a rather small com- 
 pass. But the greatest one of the additions to this mysteri- 
 ous feat, consists in the use of a pack of Biseaute cards, bet- 
 ter known as Strippers, which may be shuffled after the 
 selected cards have been replaced on top of the pack. For 
 this purpose the performer takes off the upper half of the 
 pack and turns it half way around, so that its narrow 
 ends are opposite to the remaining wide half of the pack, 
 ''^riffles" both into each other by means of the well known 
 table shuffle, familiar to all card players. Half of the strip- 
 pers now lay one way, and the other half the opposite way, 
 All that the performer, therefore, has to do in order to re- 
 store the pack to its former order, is to simply pull one half 
 of the pack out of the other, and place the two packets to- 
 gether. 
 
 The attention of my readers is also called to the various 
 ways of cutting cards, and thereby mixing them thoroughly, 
 as explained in the earlier page's of this book. The combi- 
 nation of ruses that I would suggest are a marked stripper 
 pack and the blindfolding of the performer. Equipped in 
 this manner, the artist may challenge the world (and especi- 
 ally the ubiquitous gentleman, who has a smattering of con- 
 juring,) and convince them that there are still a few things 
 "not dreamt of in their philosophy." Some of my readers 
 especially the professionals, may raise the- just objection, 
 that this feat is not suitable of being performed before a 
 large assembly of people. Neither are a number of standard 
 tricks, which nevertheless are very popular. 
 
 For an experimejit to be exhibited in the parlor, this 
 card feat, in my estimation, eclipses all others, especially as 
 it is entirely unknown to the conjurers and the public alike, 
 this being the first time that the explanation has ever been 
 made public. 
 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 
 In this version of the ' 'Ne Plus Ultra Trick" ah entirely 
 different effect is obtained by exactly the same means. 
 
56 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 After the selected cards have been returned co the pack and 
 the latter cut and quarrated as described, the performer 
 takes the cards, back uppermost, and rapidly deals them 
 face uppermost, one at a time, upon the table, placing one 
 card on top of the other. When he has done this, he hands 
 the pack, back uppermost, to a spectator and requests him to 
 deal off the cards, one at a time, upon the table. After the 
 gentleman has dealt off say six cards, the conjurer asking 
 him to stop, exclaims: "The next card that you will take 
 from the top of the pack, is the second one of the chosen 
 ones. " The spectator who selected the second card is asked 
 to call out its name, wheaeupon the gentleman in possession 
 of the pack is invited to turn over the top card and dis- 
 covers it to be the ond just named. A few more Cards are 
 then dealt off in the same manner as before, when again the 
 conjurer interrupts the gentleman and invites him to turn 
 over the card which is now on top and which is also found 
 to be one of the chosen ones, say the fourth one. In a sim- 
 ilar manner, the remaining selected cards are indicated by 
 the conjurer, while the pack remains in the possession of 
 the spectators during the entire time. 
 
 The secret depends upon the use of a simplified key, 
 formed by the keys or tables described in the preceding 
 method. My reason for not explaning this key before, is 
 simply that I wanted my reader to first thoroughly understand 
 the true nature of the feat. The key used is the following 
 one; 
 
 27 
 
 14 
 
 1 
 
 43 
 
 30 
 
 17 
 
 8 
 
 46 
 
 33 
 
 24 
 
 11 
 
 49 
 
 15 
 
 2 
 
 40 
 
 31 
 
 18 
 
 5 
 
 47 
 
 34 
 
 21 
 
 12 
 
 50 
 
 37 
 
 3 
 
 41 
 
 28 
 
 19 
 
 6 
 
 44 
 
 35 
 
 22 
 
 9 
 
 51 
 
 •38 
 
 25 
 
 42 
 
 29 
 
 16 
 
 7 
 
 45 
 
 32 
 
 23 
 
 10 
 
 48 
 
 39 
 
 26 
 
 13 
 
 4 
 
 20 
 
 36 
 
 52 
 
 As in the first method, the performer secretly notes the 
 cards directly above the selected ones and then allows the 
 pack to be cut as often as the spectators desire. After this 
 has been done, he subjects the pack to as many false cuts 
 and shuffles as he sees fit and then quadrates it in the man- 
 ner already set forth. After the quadrating process, he 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 57 
 
 deals off the cards one at a time, face uppermost upon the 
 table, counting them as he does so and noting the exact 
 number of the card that he previously placed above the 
 selected ones. We will suppose that this card occupies the 
 twenty ninth place. Consulting the key, he finds that No. 
 29 is followed by Nos. 16, 7, 45, 32, 30 etc. , which numbers 
 indicate the position of the selected cards in the pack. 
 Thus the seventh card is the second one of the chosen ones. 
 No. 16 the first. No. 30 the fifth etc. , thus enabling the con- 
 jurer to give the pack to a spectator and to predict at what 
 numbers the selected cards will turn up. 
 
 The first method, if desired, may be accomplished in 
 this manner also. After the cards have been placed in 
 eight rows upon the table, the conjurer after discovering 
 the position of the starting card, finds its number in the key 
 and proceeds to pick up the cards following the starting 
 card, the exact arrangement of the cards being shown in 
 Table No. 1. 
 
 A still more sensational finish can be given to the trick 
 by the performer predicting, in an envelope handed to a 
 spector previous to the performance, the exact position that 
 the selected cards will subsequently occupy in the pack. 
 For this purpose the same method is used that is employed 
 in the trick called "Divination of Thought, " described in 
 the latter part of this book. 
 
 PENETRATION OF MATTEB. [P\a''^^ 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 HE following trick, which originated in this city 
 
 several years ago, has since then become popular 
 
 with conjurers the world over, being no doubt one 
 
 the of best of latter-day card tricks. I can con- 
 
58 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 scientiously advise my readers who, until to-day were unac- 
 quainted with the trick, to add it to their rejjertory. 
 
 After a card has been chosen and shuffled back into the 
 pack, the latter is enclosed in a borrowed handkerchief, 
 which is held by its upper ends, as illustrated in Fig. 28. 
 
 FIG. 26. 
 Tapping with his wand against the cards in the handker- 
 chief, the performer states that he will cause the selected 
 card to separate itself from its mates and to visibly pene- 
 trate the fabric. While he is explaining this, and 
 tapping the pack with the wand at the same time, the chosen 
 card, the name of which the conjurer has previously asked 
 for, is observed to gradually force itself out through the 
 handkerchief. It is seen to protrude further and further, 
 until the entire card becomes visible and at last flutters to 
 the floor. The handkerchief is instantly opened out and the 
 cards Contained in it removed, no trace of any preparation, 
 whatever, being noticeable. The pack is then examined 
 and the selected card is found to be missing from it. 
 
 After the card has been chosen, the gentleman is re- 
 quested to return it to the center of the pack, whereupon 
 the conjurer makes the pass, thereby bringing it to the top 
 and then palming it in his right hand, over which he now 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 59 
 
 si)rea(is the previously borrowed handkerchief, arranging 
 the latter in such a way that its center is directly over 
 the palmed card, which is thus hidden beneath it. Placing 
 the remainder of the pack in the middle of the handker- 
 
 FIG. 29. 
 
 chief, exactly above the palmed card, the performer folds 
 the front half of it toward himself. Now seizing the pack 
 and the handkerchief with the left hand, he passes the 
 the right hand along it, thereby folding the loose portions 
 of the handkerchief over towards the back and then seizes 
 it by its four corners, the chosen card being by this opera- 
 tion held in the folds of the handkerchief, as illustrated in 
 Fig. 29, which, as my reader will perceive, is a rear view of 
 the position of the handkerchief and card. It will now be 
 found, that by hitting the cards in the handkerchief short, 
 quick taps with the wand, the concealed card will become 
 dislodged and gradually make its appearance with a mysti- 
 fying effect. 
 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 
 In effect, the trick I am about to describe, is somewhat 
 
60 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 similar to the preceding one, but here all resemblance 
 ceases. 
 
 Three or four cards are selected and placed with the re- 
 mainder of the pack in the center of a handkerchief, which 
 must be a tolerably large one. Seizing the four corners of 
 the latter, the performer lifts it up and commands 
 the chosen cards to penetrate the handkerchief. Giving the 
 latter a sudden shake, the desired cards are seen to issue 
 from it, fluttering to the floor. The handkerchief may now 
 be inspected, as well as the pack it still contains and from 
 which the chosen cards are found to have vanished. 
 
 FIG. 30. 
 
 The handkerchief, which in this case is the performer's 
 property, has been prepared for the trick by making in its 
 center a double fold B (Fig. 30), which must be a trifle wider 
 than the four cards which the conjurer then conceals in it. 
 These cards are duplicates of the ones to be forced later on. 
 To give the handkerchief a less suspicious appearance than in 
 the illustration, it is crumpled slightly, whereby the fold is 
 made to appear less conspicious. After the desired cards 
 have been successfully forced, they are collected by a specta- 
 tor and by him returned to the middle of the pack, which the 
 performer holds open for that purpose. Making the pass, 
 he brings them to the top and palms them off, secretly 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 61 
 
 disposing of them on the servante of the table, on which the 
 handkerchief is lying spread out. After placing the pack 
 exactly over the spot, under which the four cards are hidden, 
 the artist seizes the four corners A. A. C. C. and if desired 
 can even knot them together. By giving the handkerchief a 
 sudden downward shake, the secret fold becomes obliterat- 
 ed, the cards being thereby dislodged and falling to the 
 floor. The handkerchief still containing the other cards may, 
 now be safely passed for inspection, as by this time all 
 traces of preparation have been removed. 
 
 MAGIC VERSUS MNEMONICS. 
 
 VERY clever trick, apparently depending upon 
 a phenomenal memory possessed by the con- 
 jurer, is the following one which as the 
 title indicates is accomplished by the aid of trickery 
 alone, the pretense of mnemonics being only part of the 
 mise en scene. 
 
 The performer commences the experiment by distribut- 
 ing at random thirty two slips of paper numbered success- 
 ively from one to thirty two. Each spectator that gets a 
 slip, takes at the same time a card from a Euchre or Piquet 
 pack of thirty two cards, that the performer holds on 
 a tray. After all the slips and cards have been distributed 
 in this manner, he retires to the stage and requests each 
 spectator to call out the name of his card and number of 
 slip, at the same time asking him to write the name of his 
 card on the slip, so that it will not be forgotten. This is 
 heard by the performer's assistant, who is stationed behind 
 the wings, or a screen, or in the adjoining room. 
 
 In the assistant's possession is a duplicate pack of cards, 
 arranged systematically on the table. As soon as the spec- 
 
62 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 tator holding slip No. 1 calls out his card and number of 
 slip, th^ assistant places a duplicate of this card on place 1 
 of the following table, the second card is laid on place No. 2, 
 etc. After all of the cards have been called out he gathers 
 up the four rows, commencing with 32 and finishing with 16 
 as the last card. 
 
 Table. 
 
 32 
 
 1 
 
 17 
 
 2 
 
 25 
 
 3 
 
 18 
 
 4 
 
 29 
 
 5 
 
 19 
 
 6 
 
 26 
 
 7 
 
 20 
 
 8 
 
 31 
 
 9 
 
 21 
 
 10 
 
 27 
 
 11 
 
 22 
 
 12 
 
 30 
 
 13 
 
 23 
 
 14 
 
 28 
 
 15 
 
 24 
 
 16 
 
 Requesting a spectator to collect all the cards that were 
 distributed, the performer retires for a moment to fetch a 
 handkerchief, bringing with him the assistant's pack, which 
 he has palmed. Receiving the cards, the spectator collect- 
 ed, he places them on top of the palmed pack, both being 
 divided by the little finger, which is inserted between them. 
 At a suitable moment he takes off the top pack, which as 
 will be remembered, contains the collected cards, secretly 
 disposing of these by dropping them into the profonde or 
 on the servante of a chair or tables. Spreading out the pre- 
 arranged pack, he shows that it is well mixed and then 
 covers it with the handkerchief, under cover of which 
 he transfers the top card No. 32 to the bottom of the pack 
 and producing the next card No. 1 from underneath the 
 handkerchief, holds it up, without exhibiting its face how- 
 ever, and asks : ' 'What card does the gentleman, who holds 
 slip No. 1 wish to see?" The name of the card desired is 
 given, whereupon the performer turns over the one in his 
 hand and shows it to be the card mentioned. Replacing his 
 hand under the handkerchief, he draws off the top card (No. 
 17 of the pack) and placing it on the bottom, produces the 
 next, second card, after first requesting the spectator to call 
 out its name, continuing in this manner until all the thirty - 
 two cards have been produced from underneath the hand- 
 derchief in their successive order. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 63 
 
 THE CABIJ RECEPTACLE. 
 
 ALTHOUGH the contrivance of this name is not 
 very popular with American conjurers, it is, 
 nevertheless, a useful adjunct, which can be used 
 to excellent advantage in the performance of sev- 
 eral quite clever tricks. 
 
 The Card Receptacle, as illustrated in Fig. 31, is usually 
 
 FIG. 31. 
 
 made of cardboard or black cloth. It has four compart- 
 ments, each of which is made to contain the eight cards of 
 one suit, arranged from Ace, Seven, Eight to the King. 
 
 This case, which is concealed in the profonde (a secret 
 pocket [in the coat tail) thus contains a Piquet or Euchre 
 pack of thirty-two cards, which is the best to use, as by em- 
 ploying a full i^ack of fifty-two cards, too much time would 
 be required in picking out the card desired. It is necessary 
 that the conjurer should devote considerable practice in 
 learning to select any desired card quickly and unobserved 
 from the receptacle, of the existence of which the specta- 
 
64 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 tors are not supposed to have the slightest idea. 
 
 Sometimes two receptacles are used, each of which is 
 divided into two compartments only, one receptacle contain- 
 ing the Clubs and Spades, and the other one the Hearts and 
 Diamonds. In this case, one receptacle is concealed in the 
 left profonde and the other one in the right. 
 
 In the description of the following two tricks, I shall 
 give examples of the uses to which the Card Receptacle 
 may be put. 
 
 THE APPEABANCB OF DESIBEI) CARDS. 
 
 |FTER requesting the spectators to call out the 
 name of any card they like, the performer passes 
 for inspection a piquet pack of thirty-two ordi- 
 nary cards and invites them to shuffle the cards 
 thoroughly. After this has been done, the pack is returned 
 to him, whereupon he simply passes his empty hand over 
 the bottom card, causing the latter to be instantly trans- 
 formed into the very card that the spectators have previous- 
 ly decided upon. 
 
 While the company is occupied with the inspection and 
 shuffling of the cards, the conjurer carelessly drops his 
 hand to his side and secretly removes and palms, from the 
 receptacle concealed in his profonde, the card called for by 
 the spectators. After the pack has been returned to him, 
 he adroitly places the palmed card on the back of it, next 
 giving the cards a False Shuffle, keeping the top card in view 
 only. Then holding the pack with the bottom card facing the 
 company, he makes the Color Change, thereby transferring 
 the rear card of the pack to the front. 
 
 If desired, the trick may be repeated once or twice, the 
 artist requesting the spectators to name another card and 
 handing them the pack to be shuffled again. While this is 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 65 
 
 being done, he obtains from the case and palms the desired 
 card, being, however, careful to bear in mind which card or 
 cards have been taken out of the receptacle, so that no mis- 
 calculation on his part can possibly be made. 
 
 THE mystehiovs pnonucTioN. 
 
 pEN the spectators have shuffled an examined 
 pack of cards, the latter is placed in the inside 
 breast pocket of the coat of the performer, 
 who now repeatedly produces from this pocket 
 any card the spectators call for. 
 
 In this incomprehensible trick, two Card Receptacles, 
 containing two compartments only, are previously concealed 
 in the breast pocket. The shuffled pack is placed in front 
 of them, the performer simply taking the desired cards out 
 of the receptacles. 
 
 Another arrangement, which is considered superior to 
 the preceding one, consists of the use of a prepared 
 double breast pocket: In the rear pocket is concealed the 
 Card Receptacle, which in this case is one made of cloth. 
 Previous to placing the shuffled pack in the first compart- 
 ment of the double pocket, the conjurer invites a spectator 
 to insert his hand in the latter to prove it empty, the trick 
 then proceeding in the manner described. 
 
66 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The Improved Mysterious Production. 
 
 :N THIS improvement over the preceding trick, the 
 idea of the double pocket is carried still further. The 
 advantage of this version of the trick is that no special 
 construction of the performer's coat pocket is necess- 
 ary and besides, the latter may previously turned inside out, 
 to prove that it contains nothing. 
 
 A detachable inside pocket, made of black cloth, is used 
 
 for this purpose, its upper edges being sewn to a U shaped 
 spring wire; the turned points of which can easily be push- 
 ed through the material of the real coat pocket, in which is con- 
 cealed the Card Receptacle with its usual contents. For the 
 sake of effect, several articles such as letters, a card case 
 etc., are previously placed in the trick pocket. Thus equip- 
 ped the conjurer allows the cards to be shuf&ed, after which 
 he states his intention of placing them in his coat pocket, 
 the contents of which he first removes, then afterwards turning 
 the False Pocket inside out showing it empty. The shuf- 
 fled pack is placed on the inside and the performer then 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 67 
 
 produces from the receptacle in the pocket proper any card 
 desired by the audience. 
 
 This pocket may also be used to good advantage in the 
 following trick: Several cards are selected, returned to the 
 pack which is shuffled by one of the company. The con- 
 jurer then places the pack in his pocket, having previously 
 pulled it partly out and shown it empty. He then proceeds 
 to produce the selected cards one after the other. For this 
 purpose the Card Receptacale is not required. 
 
 The performer forces three cards, duplicates of which 
 he had previously concealed in the pocket proper. It is 
 the trick pocket, of course, that is turned out and shown to 
 be empty. 
 
 Improved Cards Head Behind The Back. 
 
 ^||0R THIS feat it is necessary that the artist should 
 ^ have two packs of cards, with similar backs. One 
 of these packs is prearranged in auy certain order 
 that the conjurer may know and conceal either be- 
 hind his back, under the vest or in a pocket made specially 
 for the purpose. The performer introduces the unprepared 
 pack, and after having it thoroughly shuffled, casually calls 
 the attention of the spectators to the bottom card, at the 
 same time noting it himself. 
 
 After causing himself to be securely blindfolded, he 
 jDlaces the shuffled cards behind his back, quickly exchanges 
 them for the prearranged pack and then slowly produces the 
 top card of the latter, hesitatingly calling out its name. He 
 proceeds in this manner, calling out the cards in succession 
 until he arrives at the card identical with that of the bottom 
 card of the secreted pack. At this moment he turns around, 
 presenting his back to the spectators, so that this particular 
 
68 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 card faces them and proceeds to draw off and name the cards 
 from the other side or bottom of the pack, simply calling off* 
 the cards in their reverse order. This process seemingly 
 leaves in its original position the bottom card of the pack, 
 which he took care to exhibit before the experiment. This 
 card is the last one named, and the majority of the spec- 
 tators probably noticed this card (really its duplicate) at the 
 bottom of the first pack shown. Everything appears to be 
 fair and above board, the deception thereby being made the 
 more effectual. 
 
 THE HYPNOTISBn CARD. 
 
 |HERE is a slight preparation required for this pretty 
 trick. The conjurer previously procures a long 
 human hair and by means of a tiny pellet of wax. 
 attaches it to the middle of the left edge of the ta- 
 ble. Near this edge lies the wand, to the tip of which is 
 attached the other end of the hair. 
 
 After a card has been selected at random, the performer 
 places half of the pack in the center of the table, then 
 seizing the wand and transferring it from its position at the 
 left to the the right side of the pack, thereby tightly 
 stretches the hair across the back of the cards on the table. 
 The spectator, who cannot see the hair, is requested to 
 place his card on top of the others, whereupon the conjurer 
 places the balance of the pack evenly on them. Seizing the 
 wand with his right hand, he states that by exercising a 
 hypnotic influence over the cards, he will cause the chosen 
 card to exhibit itself. By imperceptibly raising the wand, 
 the upper half of the pack is gradually lifted by the hair 
 and turns over, the undermost card of the upper half, which 
 is the chosen one, thereby becomes revealed. In the act of 
 
NEW ERA CARD PRICKS. 69 
 
 placing the wand under the arm, the hdir is broken and all 
 evidence of the preparation thereby destroyed. 
 
 The effect of this mysterious feat, which ought to be 
 accompanied by a suitable mise en scene, or by-play, will no 
 doubt commend itself to those of my readei^s who make a 
 specialty of parlor performances. 
 
 THE QUEEN OF THE ATB. 
 
 jN TWO small tables or stands, situated one on each 
 side of the stage, are placed two glass goblets, 
 HB which are sufficiently large to admit a pack of 
 cards. A card is then selected, returned to the 
 pack, and the latter placed in the goblet on the left. The 
 performer now commands the chosen card to rise out of the 
 pack and to travel through the air into the glass on the 
 right. A card is then seen to separate from the pack, leave 
 it and slowly float in a straight line towards the second gob- 
 let. While the card is passing from one goblet towards the 
 other, the performer asks the person if that is the 
 card he selected, and receiving a negative answer com- 
 mands the card to change into the chosen one, which it vis- 
 ibly does. Continuing its journey the card finally descends 
 into the second goblet, whence it is removed by the i)er- 
 former, who shows it from both sides. 
 
 Most of my readers will be mildly surprised to learn 
 that this rather elaborate effect, can be easily performed at 
 a very small outlay of money and trouble. For the only 
 properties required are two black silk threads, a flap card 
 and two goblets preferably with straight or perpendicular 
 sides, especially made for the purpose of holding a* pack of 
 cards. 
 
 In Pig. 33, the exact arrangement of the various ob- 
 
■0 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 jects is shown. C is a thread, which passes from an assist- 
 ant concealed behind the right wing, through a staple in the 
 floor and then upwards. To its other end is attached a 
 small metal clip, which is slipped over the end of a mechan- 
 
 FIG. 29. 
 ical card, in such a manner as to hold the flap down and when 
 pulled off by means of the thread C, the flap springs back 
 to its normal position, changing the face of the card. 
 
 Another thread A is stretched horizontally across the 
 stage, one end being held by an assistant behind the left 
 wing, and the other by the assistant on the right, already 
 mentioned. On the back of the mechanical card, near its 
 upper edge, are glued two small strips or hooks cut out of an- 
 other card with a similar back. These strips serve to sus- 
 pend the card on the thread A. These necessary prepara- 
 tions having been made, the conjurer forces a card similar to 
 the one concealed by the flap of the mechanical card. This 
 trick card with its flap held back by the metal clip, should 
 be lying face upward, on the left stand; its presence here be- 
 ing concealed by a silk handkerchief carelessly thrown over 
 it. 
 
 Returning to the stage with the pack into which the 
 selected card has been placed, the performer lays the hand- 
 kerchief aside and places the pack directly over the trick 
 card, then shows both goblets proving them unprepared. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 71 
 
 The pack with the mechanical card on its back, is now taken 
 up and placed in the left goblet, the assistants at the same 
 time lowering the thread A stretched across the stage from 
 position A to B, enabling the performer to secretly slip it 
 under the hooks of the rear trick card. At his command 
 the assistants simultaneous raise the ends of the thread A, 
 and thereby pulling the card out of the goblet. The assist- 
 ant on the right slowly draws in his end of the thread, 
 causing the card to appear as if floating through the air. 
 By the time the card has reached the center of the stage it 
 has been declared not the one selected. It is commanded to 
 stop and transform itself into the desired card. The assist- 
 ant at this moment gives a quick jerk to the thread C, there- 
 by disengaging the clip from the card, which thus instantly 
 changes to the selected one. It is then made to resume its 
 journey and to pass into the right goblet, from which it is 
 taken by the performer, who in the act of removing the 
 card, detaches it from the thread and shows it to be appar- 
 ently unprepared. 
 
 THE LOST FOUND. 
 
 jANDING A pack of cards to a spectator, the per- 
 former requests him to select any card that he de- 
 sires, to replace it anywhere in the pack and then 
 to cut the cards. While this is being done, the 
 conjurer observes what is taking place, carefully noting as 
 near as possible the position the replaced card occupies 
 after the cut, which may leave it either near the top, middle 
 or bottom of the pack. Suppose the card to be near the top, 
 occupying the eighth, ninth or tenth place, tha performer 
 holds the pack behind him and taking three cards from the 
 top, shows them and after asking if the chosen card is 
 among them, and receiving a negative reply, places them 
 
72 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 aside. He takes another set of three cards from the top, 
 repeats the process with them, placing- them on the table. 
 To take the next three cards from the top would be too 
 hazardous, as the desired card may be any one of the three. 
 The conjurer therefore takes for the next three, but one card 
 from the top and the remaining two from the bottom of the 
 pack. If the chosen card happens to be one of them, he 
 knows it, as it is the one removed from the top of the pack. 
 If, however, the chosen card was not among the three 
 cards last shown, the performer proceeds, in the manner 
 referred to, until the presence of the card in a set of three is 
 asserted, when he may simply name the card or, after re- 
 placing all the cards, bring the trick to as elaborate a finish 
 as he chooses. If, however, after the cut, the card happens 
 to be near the bottom or middle of the pack, the conjurer's 
 manipulations must necessarily be changed accordingly. 
 
 % 
 
 THE CARD CA TIGHT ON THE PEA TE. 
 
 jHE ARTIST requests a gentleman to select from 
 the pack any card he may desire and then to mark 
 it so that he will be sure to recognize it, The 
 same spectator is then handed the pack and re- 
 quested to replace his card and shuffle the cards. The per- 
 former next introduces an ordinary china plate which he 
 freely shows from both sides, proving it to be unprepared. 
 He now takes the plate in one hand and throws the pack in 
 the air with the other. As the cards descend in a shower, 
 he makes a lunge among them with the plate, upon which 
 he catches the chosen card which is given to the spectator, 
 who identifies it by his mark. 
 
 The trick is as simple as it is pretty, no previous prep- 
 aration being necessary for its performance. Before hand- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 7B 
 
 ing the cards to one of the company with the request to se- 
 lect one at random, the performer bends the ends of the 
 pack in a downward direction. After a card has been re- 
 moved, and while it is being marked, the conjurer again 
 bends the pack, but in an opposite direction, so that after 
 the spectator has returned his card to the pack, no amount 
 of shuffling will prevent the performer from immediately 
 finding the desired card. It will be the only one bent in an 
 opposite way to the rest of the cards, the j)ack opening 
 slightly at the very place where this card is situated. After 
 inserting the little finger under the chosen card, the per- 
 former brings it to the top of the pack by means of the pass. 
 Then he places the cards, for the time being, on the middle 
 of the plate, to which he has previously attached a small 
 pellet of adhesive wax. By slightly pressing the top of the 
 pack, the chosen card on the bottom is made to adhere to 
 the plate, which the conjurer then seizes and turning its 
 bottom towards the spectators, allows the free cards to slide 
 into his hand. They are then thrown into the air, the select- 
 ed card being apparently picked out from among them, with 
 the plate. After detaching the card from the plate, the 
 conjurer secretly removes any remaining traces of the wax 
 adhering perchance to the back of the card, then giving the 
 card to the spectator who selected and marked it for identi- 
 fication. 
 
 THE LANTEBN OF DIOGENES. 
 
 |LTHOUGH this clever piece of apparatus cannot 
 very well be called a novel one, despite this fact, 
 it is but little known among conjurers that a 
 pretty trick can be performed by its aid. The ap- 
 paratus consists of a transj^arent glass box, mounted on an 
 
74 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 ornamental metal base, the whole presenting the appear- 
 ance of a minature lamp post, Fig. 34. 
 
 Besides this, there is a shallow lid, by the aid of which 
 the open top of the glass box may be securely closed. In 
 the interior of the lid, which is about three inches long and 
 two inches wide, is concealed a folding card which is held in 
 place by a clip B which can be released by pressing the stud A 
 situated on the outside of the lid. The lower half of the 
 card, is blackened to resemble the interior of the lid, thus 
 rendering the card invisible when held in position by the 
 
 FIG. 34. 
 clip. In the performance of the trick, the glass lantern 
 which is about as high as a card is long, is exhibited sepa- 
 rated from the lid and seen to be perfectly empty. The lid 
 is then casually shown and placed on the lantern proper, the 
 card not being visible on account of its blackened lower half. 
 A borrowed handkerchief is now thrown over the upper 
 part of the lantern, and the stud A being pressed during 
 this operation causing the card, concealed in the lid to be- 
 come released. On account of the elastic hinge in its center, 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 75 
 
 the card unfolds and assumes an upright position in the 
 glass box. A duplicate card is now forced by the performer, 
 who after vanishing it in any manner he may see fit, sub- 
 sequently finds it in the lantern, all parts of which may now 
 be freely shown. 
 
 Extraordinary Restoration, 
 
 iN THIS striking improvement over the well known 
 and popular, ''Torn Corner Card Trick," a slight 
 preparation of the pack is required. All the Aces, 
 with the exception of Ace of Spades are previously 
 removed. The latter card is prepared by neatly inking its 
 edge, all around, so that it can easily be distinguished from 
 the other cards by looking at the edge of the pack. 
 
 ^,U01TRfi65.^, 
 
 FIG. 35. 
 
 
 FIG. 36. 
 
 From the pack thus arranged the Queen of Hearts is 
 forced on a lady, who is requested to tear the card into 
 eight or nine pieces, which she is asked to place on an ex- 
 amined china plate held by the performer, who secretly adds 
 to these pieces a duplicate corner which he had previously 
 torn from another Queen of Hearts, the latter being con- 
 cealed in any piece of apparatus, say for instance the Sand 
 Frame. Keeping this corner in view, the conjurer invites 
 several of the company to take a piece of the torn card, 
 
76 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 taking good care to note who gets the duplicate corner. He 
 then requests each spectator holding a piece of the torn card 
 to take from the pack any card he desires. The performer 
 really forces the Ace of Spades known by its blackened edge 
 on the i)erson holding the duplicate corner. To increase 
 the effect of the trick, he may force this card in the second 
 or third instance, then inviting each one of the remaining 
 spectators to take the pack, face downwards into his hands 
 aild allowing him to draw any card he likes. After this has 
 been done, the performer states that he will leave selection 
 to chance, the person holding the highest card, shall retain 
 the piece of the torn card in his possession while all the 
 other pieces are collected. As the gentleman who took the 
 Ace of Spades also holds the duplicate corner, the remain- 
 ing pieces are collected and placed into a Card Box or Magic 
 Pistol, from which they are caused to disappear, only to re- 
 appear fully restored, minus the retained corner or piece, in 
 the Sand Frame, which has been shown empty, covered by 
 a handkerchief and given to a lady to hold. The frame 
 is uncovered and in it is found the Queen of Hearts as com- 
 manded. The card is taken out and given to the gentleman 
 who selected the Ace of Spades; he fits the retained corner 
 to it which of course is found to match exactly. 
 
 APPARENT SEC OKI) SIGHT. 
 
 (ROM an unprepared, preferably borrowed, pack of 
 ^, .___^ cards, the artist requests the spectators to select, 
 »^^g^ during his absence, any number of cards, which 
 ^^ are to be placed, in a separate heap, upon the table 
 
 and covered with a borrowed handkerchief. After the 
 return of the performer, he is is blindfolded and the selected 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 77 
 
 cards shuffled into the pack which is then given to him. 
 Holding the cards behind his back, the conjurer then suc- 
 cessively produces all of the chosen cards. 
 
 FIG. 37. 
 
 The secret of the trick depends upon the use of a clever 
 little contrivance, called the Card Marker, which will be 
 useful in the course of many other card tricks. The Card 
 Marker, Fig. 37, consists of the hook (C) and plate (B), to 
 which is soldered a needle point (A). To the lower end of 
 the plate (B) is fastened a strong thread of flesh colored silk, 
 to which in turn is attached the elastic cord (E), in the end 
 of which a loop is made. To attach the apparatus to the 
 person, hook C is slipped under a ring worn on the third 
 finger of the right hand, the thread (D) and elastic (E) be- 
 ing passed up the inside of the sleeve to one of the rear sus- 
 pender buttons, under which the loop of the elastic is en- 
 gaged. 
 
 After the selected cards have been placed on the table 
 and covered by the haudkerchief , the performer places his 
 hand over them, for an instant only, as if to convince him- 
 self of their presence. This moment suffices for him to 
 
78 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 press the fine needle point of the Card Marker through the 
 handkerchief into the cards. By the passing of the needle 
 point through the cards, there is formed a slight projection, 
 hardly discernible to the eye but readily distinguished by 
 the touch. After the chosen cards have been shuffled into 
 the pack, it is an easy matter for the conjurer to pick out, 
 behind his back, the desired cards by simply feeling for the 
 projections made by the point of the needle. After having 
 succeeded in marking the covered cards, the performer de- 
 taches hook C, by pushing it out of the ring with one of the 
 fingers of the right hand, the Card Marker being then in- 
 stantly pulled inside of the sleeve, owing to the action of the 
 tightly stretched elastic. 
 
 FIG. 38. 
 A more portable form of the Card Marker is a Finger 
 Ring, which has a needle point brazed to it as shown in Fig. 
 38. Those of my readers who do not wish to incur the ex- 
 pense of purchasing either form of the contrivance, can sub- 
 stitute for the latter a short pin, which can easily concealed 
 between the fingers, its point being pressed into the cards in 
 the same manner as with the regular contrivances. 
 
 THE ATTACHED CARD. 
 
 SPECTATOR is invited to step forward and is 
 requested to assist the conjurer in the trick about 
 to follow. Introducing an ordinary pack of cards 
 the performer asks him to select a card, which is. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 79 
 
 say the Five of Hearts, and to return it to the pack, which 
 is then shuffled. Handing the pack to the spectator, the 
 performer tells him to remove his card from the latter, but 
 to his astonishment the gentleman finds that the Five of 
 Hearts has mysteriously vanished. Both, he and the con- 
 jurer institute a search for the missing card, which is finally 
 discovered sticking under the back of the gentleman's coat 
 collar. 
 
 FIG. 39. 
 
 For this clever sleight of hand trick, it will be necessary 
 to have an extra Five of Hearts, placing both on top of the 
 pack. As the spectator steps forward to assist the per- 
 former, the latter palms the top card of the pack and while 
 instructing the gentleman, places the hand in which the card 
 is palmed, in a confidential manner on the back of the per- 
 son and adroitly pushes the palmed card partly under 
 his coat collar. He then makes the pass, and forces the 
 duplicate of the Five of Hearts on the assisting spectator, 
 who returns it to the pack. The performer makes the pass, 
 bringing the card to the top of the pack and proceeds to 
 give the latter a vigorous but false shuffle, keeping the Five 
 of Hearts at the top. In handing the pack to the gentle- 
 man, with the request to pick out his card, he palms off the 
 top card and disposes of it while the spectator is engaged in 
 looking for his card, which of course he is unable to find. 
 
 The performer who also pretends to be at a loss as to the 
 whereabouts of the missing card, then asks the person to 
 assist him in the search for it During the search, the spec- 
 
80 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 tator is artfully induced by the performer to turn his back 
 to the company. They immediately appraise him of the 
 presence of the card by their merriment. The performer 
 then pretends to first discover the card and after removing 
 it, dismisses the gentleman with a hearty handshake, ac- 
 companied by the remark that he is evidently somewhat of 
 a conjurer himself. 
 
 CABDS SHOT AGAINST A HAT. 
 
 |HE PERFORMER borrows a silk hat, which he 
 places on his table, so that the crown of the hat, 
 which has been previously covered by a borrowed 
 handkerchief, is turned towards the company. 
 Three cards are then selected and after being torn into small 
 pieces by the persons who drew them, are loaded into the 
 Magic Pistol, which the conjurer discharges at the hat. 
 After the report of the pistol, the handkerchief is seen to 
 fall, revealing the three selected cards, completely restored 
 on the crown of the hat. They are removed and the hat is 
 returned to its owner with the usual thanks on the part of 
 the performer. 
 
 The preparation for this trick consists of neatly cover- 
 ing, with newspaper, the backs of three cards, duplicates of 
 the ones that the conjurer intends to force. The point of a 
 thumb tack is then pushed through the face of the middle 
 card (2) in such a way that it will at the same time penetrate 
 a corner of cards 1 and 3 (See Fig. 40). All three are then 
 placed on a sheet of paper similar in appearance to the one 
 with which they are backed, the paper being then placed on 
 the conjurer's table. Even at a short distance, it will be im- 
 possible to notice the presence of the three cards on the 
 paper. 
 
 The crown of the hat is then placed in a careless man- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 81 
 
 ner directly over these cards, which, by a slight downward 
 pressure on the part of the performer, become attached to 
 the hat by means of the thumb tack. The handkerchief is 
 now placed over the side of the hat in such a manner that 
 when the hat is lifted and its crown turned towards the 
 
 FIG. ,40. 
 
 company, the handkerchief will completely hide the prepara- 
 tion. While arranging the handkerchief, the conjurer se- 
 cretly attaches to one of its corners, a bent pin or small 
 sharp hook, to which is fastened a fine black thread which 
 passes to an assistant behind the scenes. 
 
 The three duplicate cards are then forced and after hav- 
 ing been torn into small pieces, are loaded into the barrel of 
 the pistol as described. At the moment the latter is dis- 
 charged, the assistant gives a slight pull to the thread, caus- 
 ing the handkerchief to drop down, exposing the three 
 cards attached to the crown of the hat. 
 
82 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 WAR IN PEACE. 
 
 |LL MAGICIANS are acquainted with the feat in 
 which three chosen cards are caught on the point 
 of a sword, out of the air into which the pack 
 has been thrown. The cards, which have been 
 previously concealed in a receptacle attached to the hilt of 
 the sword, are in this case pulled to the tip of the latter by 
 means of a stout elastic cord. 
 
 As a good sword of this description is quite an exj^en- 
 sive article which, at its best, is obviously mechanical and 
 will not bear close inspection, I take pleasure in making my 
 readers acquainted with a simpler method of doing the 
 trick, by which any sword, even a borrowed one, may be 
 used. 
 
 Previous to the trick, the conjurer takes four cards and 
 out of the center of the first one, cuts an oval shajjed piece 
 a little larger in circumference than the tip of the sword 
 which he intends to use. In the second card he cuts 
 a hole still larger than that in the first one, etc., each of the 
 four cards being provided with a larger hole than that in the 
 card preceding it. The four cards are then connected by a 
 fine black thread, an interval of about four inches being left 
 between the cards, which the performer then conceals in his 
 pochette (a small pocket sewn on the rear side of the leg of 
 the trousers) or any other convenient part of his person. 
 
 He then forces duplicates of the four prepared cards 
 and has them returned to the pack, secretly placing on the 
 top of the latter, the four cards of his own, which he has in 
 the meantime secretly palmed. 
 
 After exhibiting the sword, he takes it in the right hand, 
 holding the pack by one comer in his left and placing the 
 tip of the sword against the back of the cards, inserts it in 
 the largest hole of the topmost one. He then proceeds to 
 toss the pack into the air, at the same time making a lunge 
 with the sword after it. The four cards, which owing to 
 the holes in them, are retained by the sword, now slide along 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 83 
 
 the blade of the latter, the first card remaining near the tij) 
 while the others arrrnge themselves along the blade of the 
 sword. 
 
 THE NEW CABD TABLE. 
 
 OST conjurers are familiar with the construction 
 of that useful apparatus known as the "Card 
 Tripod" or "Card Table," which is generally 
 used in the restoration of burnt or mutilated 
 
 cards. 
 
 FIG. 41. 
 
 With the card table of the old form, only one change 
 can be made, while with the new improved apparatus, two 
 distinct changes take place without altering the appearance 
 of the table proper, which is shown as A in Pig. 41. B is 
 
84 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 a shallow lid, fitting over the top of A; C is a second lid, 
 which in turn fits somewhat tightly over B. D is an orna- 
 mental cover, which has an extra inside lining, conforming 
 in shape and appearance to the lid proper. This lining, 
 which is indicated by the dotted lines in the drawing, can be 
 moved up and down by manipulation of the knob on the 
 upper part of the lid, for the purpose of forcing C out of 
 the cover when desired. 
 
 To illustrate the uses to which this apparatus may be 
 put, we will suppose that the conjurer intends to perform 
 the Torn Corner Card Trick. He prepares for this by plac- 
 ing on C a duplicate of the card, say the Jack of Clubs, that 
 
 FIG. 42. 
 he intends to use in the experiment, and placing C in the 
 lower end of the cover, which it fits rather tightly. On A 
 he places another Jack of Clubs, from which a corner has 
 been torn (or still better, a piece torn out of its center), the 
 fragment lying, for the time being, concealed in the conjur- 
 er's vest pocket. Over A, lid B is then placed. 
 
 These preparations having been made, the performer 
 advances towards the company, and after forcing a third 
 Jack of Clubs, requests the person, who selected it, to tear 
 the card into small pieces. While that is being done, he ob- 
 tains possession of the fragment concealed in his vest pocket 
 and after receiving the torn pieces from the gentleman, 
 returns to him what seems to be one of them with the re- 
 quest to retain it in his possession, the performer hand- 
 ing him the extra corner or piece. The torn pieces are 
 laid on the table, that is on B, the cover is then firmly 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 85 
 
 placed on the table. In removing it a few seconds later, B 
 is carried along with lid C in the cover and the card prev- 
 iously concealed under B, thus revealed. It is shown and 
 handed to the gentleman, who kept the fragment, which of 
 course is found to fit it exactly. Taking both the card and 
 the piece the performer replaces them on the table that is 
 on A, and covers them one more. In removing the lid the 
 last time he presses the knob, by which process the in- 
 side lining is forced down, causing both lids, B and C, to re- 
 main on A. The card previously concealed on C is thus 
 brought into view, the effect to the spectators being, that 
 the card and corner just shown, have now become fully re- 
 stored, especially as in taking off the cover this time, the 
 conjurer casually exhibited its interior, to prove all absence 
 of preparation. The flanges on B and C, which are no 
 wider than the turned flange or edge of A, cause the latter 
 to retain the same appearance during all stages of the 
 trick thus greatly adding to the deception. 
 
 As already stated, the trick just described simply serves 
 to illustrate one of the many ways in which to utilize the 
 Improved Card Table : I have no doubt but that the ingen- 
 uity of my reader will suggest other tricks in which the ap- 
 paratus can be used to good advantage. 
 
 Thought Reading Extraordinary, 
 
 ^FTER A spectator has mentally selected a card at 
 the request of the conjurer, the latter also asks 
 some one to think of a number between One and 
 Ten. Both persons are instructed to whisper the 
 name of the card and number respectively, to their neigh- 
 bor so that no mistake can occur. The performer asks the 
 first gentleman to state aloud the name of the card of which 
 he thought, say for instance the Nine of Hearts. The 
 
86 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 second gentleman is then told to call out his number, which 
 we will suppose is Seven. A disinterested spectator is in- 
 vited to count off seven cards from the top of the pack, 
 which during all this time has been lying on the table, and 
 to show the next card to the company. 
 
 To their astonishment, they discover it to be the card 
 thought of, which the artist, without approaching the pack, 
 has caused to appear at the very number secretly thought of 
 by another spectator. 
 
 So much for the effect of the trick, which certainly is 
 one of the most mysterious ever invented. In order to know 
 the card thought of, the performer uses of the various ex- 
 pedients previously explained under the heading of 
 '•Sleights,'* then instantly brings the chosen card to the top 
 of the pack. While inviting the second gentleman to think 
 of a number and to whisper it to his neighbor, he quickly 
 counts off from the bottom seven cards and by means of the 
 pass, brings them to the top of the pack, which he then 
 places on the table. The chosen card, in our supposed 
 
 [}f 
 
 
 f 1 
 
 f 
 
 
 f 
 
 A 
 
 f 
 
 * 
 
 * 
 
 t. 
 
 
 *! 
 
 PIG. 43. 
 
 case the Nine of Hearts, now occupies the eighth place, 
 counted from the top of the pack. The gentleman is next 
 requested to state the number he thought of and in nine 
 cases out of ten, it will be found that he has thought of 
 number seven, in which instance the trick, which is practi- 
 cally finished, proceeds as described. If the number eight 
 has been decided upon, the gentleman is simply told to turn 
 up the eighth card counted from the top of the pack. If 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 87 
 
 nine is the selected number, the conjurer himself takes the 
 I)ack from the table and in the act of handing" it to the gen- 
 tleman, by means of the Slip Pass, brings one card from the 
 bottom to the top of the pack. If a number below seven 
 has been taken, the performer is obliged to transfer a cor- 
 responding number of cards from the top to the bottom of 
 the pack by means of the pass. But as I have already re- 
 marked, these expedients, although not detracting to any 
 extent from the merits of the trick, will seldomly have to be 
 employed. 
 
 A Mysterious Change, 
 
 VERY pretty effect may be obtained by the intro- 
 duction of the following trick. The several novel 
 sleights used, ought however to be thoroughly prac- 
 ticed before an attempt is made of performing the 
 trick in public. After a card, say the King of Hearts has 
 been chosen and returned to the pack, the latter is given a 
 False Shuffle, whereby this particular card is left on the top 
 of the pack. The conjurer then pretends to be able to pick 
 out the chosen card, by running his fingers over the top 
 edge of the pack, slightly rufling it and removing the two 
 cards on the top, which are the King of Hearts and another 
 card, say the Ace of Hearts, which he must hold in sucli 
 a way that the spectators think them to be one card only. 
 For this purpose, both the cards are held slightly con vexed, 
 toward the palm, the thumb at the lower end and the fingers at 
 the upper end of the cards. Thus exhibiting the cards, which 
 to the company appear to be but one and that the Ace of 
 Hearts, the performer asks if this is the card selected, and upon 
 being told that it is not, replaces the card in the middle of the 
 pack held by the other hand, allowing it to protrude nearly 
 two inches. This is what really takes place: 
 
88 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The pack itself is held in the extended left hand, the 
 thumb of which rests on one side of the cards, the first 
 finger at their upper end and the remaining fingers at the 
 other side of the pack, which faces the palm. In the act 
 of replacing the cards with the right hand, the position of 
 
 FIG. 44. 
 
 FIG. 45. 
 
 the fingers holding it, is changed, the card being now held 
 by its upper end only, the thumb and first finger resting on 
 the back of the card and the other fingers on the face side 
 or bottom. With the left thumb the pack is slowly ruffled 
 and the card in the right hand inserted sideways. While 
 this is being done, the second finger of the right hand 
 pushes the lower one of the two cards, that is the Ace of 
 Hearts, towards the pack, the first finger of the left hand 
 completing the work of imperceptibly pushing the card 
 home, leaving the selected card to protrude from the rest of 
 the pack. When properly executed, this sleight is absolute- 
 ly invisible, it being shielded altogether by the upper one 
 of the two cards which, as will be remembered, is the King of 
 Hearts, although the spectators really believe it to be the 
 Ace of Hearts. The performer once more asks whether 
 the protruding card is not the selected one and is told that 
 the selected card has not been shown. He then takes the 
 projecting card and places it face downwards on the ex- 
 tended hand of the gentleman, who is told to breathe upon 
 it, when it is thereby apparently transformed into the de- 
 sired one. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 89 
 
 THE CARD AND HAWDKERCHIEF. 
 
 IHE following is a neat trick, in which a selected 
 card visibly appears on a handkerchief held by 
 the performer. A handkerchief is borrowed from 
 some obliging male spectator and is, for the time 
 being, spread on the performer's table. A card, say the 
 Five of Diamonds, is placed on a plate and burned. Its 
 
 PIG. 46. 
 
 ashes are loaded iuto the Magic Pistol, which is given to a 
 a gentleman, who is requested to discharge it at the per- 
 former when the latter commands. 
 
 FIG. 47. 
 Taking the handkerchief by its four corners and hold- 
 ding it as shown in Fig. 47, the conjurer explains that, upon 
 the firing of the pistol, he will release two of the corners of 
 the handkerchief, illustrating this by actually dropping the 
 
90 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 two front corners of the latter, thus exposing the entire 
 handkerchief and incidentally showing that nothing is at- 
 tached to it. 
 
 Seizing the corners again, he commands the spectator to 
 fire. At the moment of releasing the corners, the restored 
 Five of Diamonds is seen attached to the center of the hand- 
 kerchief, which, after the card has been removed from it, is 
 returned to its owner. 
 
 Previous to the trick, a duplicate Five of Diamonds is 
 placed face downwards on the conjurer's table. To the back 
 of this card is fastened a small pellet of adhesive wax. In 
 spreading the handkerchief on the table, the performer so 
 arranges that the rear half of the handkerchief is placed 
 directly over the hidden card and, by a little pressure, it is 
 made to adhere to the handkerchief. A Five of Diamonds 
 is now forced and, after it is burned, its ashes are placed 
 into the pistol which, as described, is given to some gentle- 
 man to hold. 
 
 In picking up the handkerchief, the conjurer folds the 
 front half over the rear half and holds it as shown in Fig. 
 47, the Five of Diamonds being attached on the rear side of 
 the half CD of the handkerchief, consequently it is invisible 
 from the front. In releasing the two corners in his explana- 
 tion, the conjurer drops the front half, thereby proving the 
 handkerchief to be seemingly unprepared. Regaining pos- 
 session of the two corners, he requests the gentleman to 
 fire and, at the proper moment, releases comers CD, the 
 side of the handderchief to which the card is attached, be- 
 coming visible, disclosing the card. In removing the Five of 
 Diamonds, he secretly scrapes off the small pellet of wax and 
 carelessly throws the card on the table so that in case any 
 one should express a desire to examine the card, his wish 
 can instantly be gratified. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 91 
 
 THE ITINERANT CARD. 
 
 [HE conjurer introduces an ordinary pack, contained 
 in the original case and still securely sealed by 
 the usual government stamp. After opening the 
 case and removing the pack, he divides the latter 
 into two heaps, one of which is made to contain all the red 
 cards, that is, the Hearts and Diamonds; the other one con- 
 sisting of all the Clubs and Spades, or black cards. Invit- 
 ing the spectators to choose one of these heaps, without in- 
 fluencing their choice in the least, he requests some one to 
 take the selected heap and to wrap it in a sheet of paper, 
 the ends of the parcel being then securely sealed. After 
 this has been done, a lady is asked to indicate one of the 
 cards of the remaining heap, which is then given to her 
 to hold. The card just chosen, which we will suppose to be 
 
 FIG. 48. FIG. 49. 
 
 the Ten of Hearts, is now commanded to leave the heap in 
 which it is contained and told to join the cards in the sealed 
 parcel. The latter, which consists of the black cards, is 
 opened and found to contain the chosen card, the Ten of 
 Hearts, while from the heap held by the lady, this same 
 card is found to be missing. 
 
 In order to be able to perform this interesting feat, the 
 performer requires duplicates of two spot cards of the pack, 
 say the Ten of Hearts and the Nine of Spades. Taking a 
 pack of cards, with the backs similar to those of the dupli- 
 tate cards, he carefully removes the government stamp, 
 which seals the case, and taking out a red and a black card, 
 
92 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 attaches the Ten of Hearts to the back of the black card 
 and the Nine of Spades to the back of the red card, by 
 means of white, unscented soap. Both double cards ought 
 then, in order to obtain a good result, be placed for some 
 time under pressure, after which they are ready to be used. 
 Adding these cards to the others in the case, the performer 
 closes it and and neatly replaces the stamp in its former po- 
 sition. 
 
 Thus prepared, he proceeds as described, by first call- 
 ing the attention of the company to the newness of the 
 pack, which they will believe is undisturbed in its original 
 package. The pack is then divided into red and black cards, 
 and after one of the heaps is chosen, which in our case was 
 the one containing the black cards, it is wrapped and sealed 
 as explained. Seizing the remaining heap of red cards, the 
 conjurer induces a lady to indicate the Ten of Hearts, by 
 means of the force. He immediately makes the pass, brings 
 the card to the top of the pack and disposes of it at the first 
 opportunity offering itself. 
 
 Before the sealed parcel is opened, ths performer takes it 
 in his hands for a moment, presumably to show to the com- 
 pany that the seals are still intact, but in reality to gain an 
 opportunity to bend the parcel back aud forth, by which 
 process the Ten of Hearts, adhering to the back of the black 
 cards, becomes detached and is subsequently discovered 
 among the black cards by a spectator. 
 
 The Terpsiehorean Card. 
 
 PTER some trick with a chosen card, the performer 
 gives a pretended explanation of his tricks, by ex- 
 plaining to the audience that all that is necessary, 
 is to have the cards well trained, when they will 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 93 
 
 do just as they are bid. He illustrates this by standing a 
 a card in an upright position upon the table, then immediately 
 passing the card for inspection to prove that it is not pre- 
 pared in any way. Again placing the card in the same up- 
 right position, he requests some one to play a lively air 
 upon the piano, commanding the card to keep time with the 
 music, which it does, dancing about in a lively fashion. 
 Telling the card to discontinue its terpsichorean efforts, the 
 conjurer takes it and once more passes it for examination. 
 
 FIG. 50. 
 For this trick a small apparatus made of tin or brass, 
 bent in the shape shown in Fig. 50, is required. To its 
 lower end is attached an extra weight, in the form of a lump 
 of solder (B). On the flat, upright part of the apparatus, 
 adhesive wax is evenly spread, the contrivance being then 
 concealed in the right hand of the conjurer. Seizing the 
 selected card with the left hand, he transfers it to the 
 right, secretly attaching the back of the card to the waxed 
 side of the apparatus. The card may now be placed upright 
 on the table, its face, of course, being turned towards the 
 company. Taking up the card with the right hand, it is 
 again transferred to the left, the apparatus being detached 
 and palmed during the operation, so that the card may be 
 examined. 
 
94 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The operation is repeated and this time a thread, 
 stretched horizontally across the stage, is lowered by an as- 
 sistant, behind the scenes, to a level with hook A, under 
 which the thread is slipped by the performer, at whose com- 
 mand the card proceeds to execute a dance, the assistant 
 manipulating the thread, keeping time with the music. 
 Finally the card is seized, the thread being allowed to slip 
 out from under the hook, whereupon the performer, after 
 again detaching and palming off the little apparatus, once 
 more passses the card for inspection. 
 
 % 
 
 THE CARD IN THB POCKET. 
 
 ^pN this trick, which will particularly commend it- 
 p^ self to the beginner who has not yet mastered the 
 various sleights necessary for the performance of the 
 more elaborate tricks, a card, that a spectator has se- 
 cretly thought of, disappears from the pack and is dis- 
 covered in the tail pocket of the performer's coat. 
 
 The performer commences the experiment by offering the 
 spectators a pack of cards, with the request for one of them 
 to note and bear in mind a certain card and to note at what 
 number, counting from the bottom of the pack, the card 
 lies. This having been done and the pack returned to the 
 conjurer, the latter, under the pretense of looking for the 
 chosen card, quickly passes the cards, one by one, from the 
 left hand into the right, by which process the former bottom 
 card now becomes the topmost one. Above the last card, 
 he places three more indifferent cards taken from the bot- 
 tom of the pack. Acknowledging that he is unable to dis- 
 cover the card in this manner, he returns the pack to the 
 spectator, requesting him to count off from the top of the 
 pack, the same number of cards that his card was removed 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 95 
 
 from the bottom card. After his request has been complied 
 with, the conjurer knows that the fourth card from the top 
 of the pack must be the selected one. Seizing the three 
 uppermost cards, he places them face downwards upon the 
 table and boldly asserts that the chosen card is among them, 
 inviting the spectator to look and see that such is really the 
 case. While the person is engaged in doing so, failing of 
 course to discover his card among them, the conjurer takes 
 advantage of this opportunity to palm off the top card of 
 pack, then throws the latter on the table, asking the gentle- 
 man to name the card. 
 
 FIG. 57. 
 We will suppose it is the Four of hearts. "The Four 
 of Hearts, my dear sir," says the conjurer, "That cannot be, 
 as I have had this card in the pocket of my coat all the even- 
 ing. " Reaching into the indicated pocket, he produces the 
 selected card, and upon inspection of the pack it is found to 
 be missing. 
 
 The Spectator as Conjurer. 
 
 jIKE several other tricks described in this book, the 
 experiment that I am about to explain, cannot pro- 
 perly be called a new one, but the fact of its being 
 so little known, renders it practically new to most 
 conjurers. 
 
96 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 From a paper of pins, a number are selected by the 
 spectators, one of whom is then requested to choose a card 
 from the pack, said card being, say, the Eight of Hearts. 
 This card is returned to the pack and the cards shuffled. 
 The conjurer then produces his magic pistol and proceeds to 
 load into it the selected pins, giving the pistol in charge of 
 the spectator who drew the Eight of Hearts. Seizing the 
 pack, the performer explains that he is about to throw the 
 cards into the air, requesting the gentleman who holds the 
 pistol, to take good aim at the cards and to discharge the 
 pistol at the word of command. The cards are tossed into 
 the air, the pistol fired, and among the cards, fallen to the 
 floor, is discovered the selected Eight of Hearts, being 
 pierced by exactly the same number of pieces that have 
 been loaded into the pistol. 
 
 When the paper of pins is returned to the performer, 
 the latter by a furtive glance, immediately knows the num- 
 ber of pins that have been removed. By means of a sim- 
 ple system of cues, he conveys this information to the assis- 
 tant behind the scenes, who quickly takes a duplicate Eight 
 of Hearts and sticks into it the same number of pins that 
 the spectators have selected. It is best to previously blacken 
 these pins slightly in a candle flame. In the meantime, the 
 performer has forced the other Eight of Hearts, which is re- 
 placed in the pack. Then, making the pass and palming 
 off the top card, which is the selected one, he retires for a 
 moment to fetch the pistol, disposing of the palmed card 
 card and palming, in its stead, the prepared card. Return- 
 ing to the stage, he seizes the pack with the same hand in 
 which the card is palmed, leaving it on the top. The pins 
 are then loaded into the false compartment of the pistol, the 
 latter being subsequently discharged at the pack, as the 
 performer throws it into the air. The card, pierced by the 
 pins, being among the falling cards, is then discovered in 
 their midst. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 GRAVITY DEFIEn. 
 
 ^li^NE of the most interesting and indetectable of im- 
 promptu tricks with cards, is the feat that I am 
 about to explain; the performer causing all the 
 cards of the pack to adhere and remain suspended, 
 in a most mysterious way, to the lower side of the hand, 
 which, as well as the cards, can be closely inspected at all 
 stages of the trick, the performer carrying the cards about 
 as they cling to his hand and inviting any one who so desires 
 to convince himself of the mysterious nature of the experi- 
 ment. 
 
 FIG. 52, 
 Those of my readers who are not acquainted with the 
 secret of the trick, will be moderately surprised to know 
 that nothing but a fine needle is required for the perform- 
 ance of the trick. Previous to the exhibition, the conjurer 
 has pushed this needle through the skin of the inside of the 
 hand, as shown in Fig. 52. The hand, thus prepared, can 
 be used with impunity, as the needle will not in the least in- 
 commode a person. 
 
98 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 When ready to exhibit the trick, the artist- places the 
 prepared hand flat on the table and pushes a card under 
 each end the needle, Fig. 53. Two more cards are next 
 
 FIG. 53. 
 
 FIG. 54. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 99 
 
 placed between the first two and the hand, Fig. 54. With 
 the exception of two cards, the remainder of the pack is 
 then inserted in a circle between the first four cards and the 
 palm, which the performer now turns over in order to intro- 
 duce the remaining two cards, shown by dotted lines in Fig. 
 55. One end of one of these cards is placed underneath the 
 Ace of Diamonds and above the Five of Spades, thus hiding 
 one half of the needle, while part of the last card is placed 
 underneath the Five of Spades and above the Ace of Dia- 
 monds, the needle being thereby hidden completely. 
 
 FIG. 55. 
 
 The conjurer now exhibits both sides of the hand, bend- 
 ing back the cards to allow the company to inspect the sur- 
 face of the inside of the hand, to prove that there is abso- 
 lutely no preparation of any kind. 
 
 By exerting a slight pressure on the backs of the cards, 
 with the fingers of the hand holding them, the loop of the 
 skin, which holds the cards, is broken and all the cards, to- 
 gether with the needle, drop to the floor. Or, if the con- 
 jurer does not wish to do this, he can cause all the cards to 
 fall off, by simply giving a quick lateral movement of the 
 
100 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 hand. In this case, he secretly draws the needle out from 
 under the skin at the first opportunity which offers itself. 
 
 THE UEMON ENVELOPE. 
 
 |HE performer enters, bearing a large envelope in 
 one hand and a complete pack of cards in the 
 other. Placing the envelope against a candle- 
 stick, or some piece of apparatus on his table, so 
 that it remains in full view during the course of the trick, he 
 proceeds to shuffle the cards. Then seizing an ornamental 
 dagger or paper knife, he goes among the company and, 
 handing a spectator the dagger, requests him to insert it 
 anywhere in the pack. The performer takes off all the 
 cards above the knife and asks the gentleman to take the 
 topmost card of the lower heap, on which the knife now 
 rests, cautioning him to remove the card, so that, he, 
 the performer, cannnot obtain a glimpse of its face. In a 
 similar manner, six more cards are selected at random by 
 different spectators, each one retaining his card in his pos- 
 session. Remaining away from the company, the performer 
 calls for his assistant, who is told to hand the envelope to 
 some prominent gentleman, who is then requested to open 
 it. Doing so, he discovers in it another envelope, on the 
 outside of which is written the name of the card selected by 
 the first gentleman, who is requested to hold up his card, so 
 that everyone can see that both the card and the name on 
 the envelope correspond. The next envelope is opened, and 
 inside of it is found a third one, bearing the name of the 
 second card chosen. The trick proceeds in this manner, th*^ 
 gentleman discovering as many envelopes, one inside of an- 
 other, as there were cards selected, each envelope bearing 
 the correct name of a drawn card. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 101 
 
 The solution of this mysterious and effective trick is 
 very simple indeed. In the first place, it is necessary that 
 the performer and his assistant should have memorized some 
 simple code of Second Sight, consisting of seventeen differ- 
 ent cues, thirteen of them representing the different values 
 of the cards and four the suits. The pack of cards that is 
 used is prearranged, the shuffle to which it is subjected be- 
 ing a false one. 
 
 The envelope placed by the performer upon the table is 
 really empty, the set of envelopes opened later on by the 
 spectators, being in possession of the assistant behind the 
 scenes. After the dagger has been inserted in the pack by 
 the first gentleman, the performer, as will be remembered, 
 takes off* all the cards above the dagger. By glancing at 
 the lowest card of this heap, thanks to his formula, he can 
 instantly tell the name of the card that has been taken. In 
 inviting the second gentleman to insert the dagger any- 
 where in the pack, he words his request in such a way as to 
 bring into play the cue for the name of the first card select- 
 ed, the assistant, who is listening, thus becoming acquainted 
 with the name of the card. For the different cues, such 
 simple short phrases as "Now, sir,"' "Please,"' "If you 
 please," "Kindly,'' etc., will be found to be the most service- 
 able. The exact arrangement I leave to the ingenuity of my 
 reader, who, no doubt, can easily invent a brief system, 
 nicely adapted to his own style. By this means he com- 
 municates all the names of the selected cards to his assis- 
 tant, who writes them separately on the outsides of the 
 envelopes and, quickly enclosing them in one another, 
 places them into a still larger envelope, which he conceals 
 under his coat and stands ready to obey the call of the per- 
 former, who, in order to give him the necessary chance to 
 get ready, has occupied a little time by stating what has 
 taken place, explaining how utterly impossible it would be 
 for anyone to know the names of the cards selected in such 
 a fair manner. 
 
 Calling for the assistant, the latter steps forward and is 
 
102 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 told to take the envelope from the table and to hand it to a 
 gentleman, whom he requests the audience to select. While 
 this is being done, the assistant turns about to pick up the 
 envelope, at the same time obtaining possession of the one 
 concealed under his coat. He secretly places it on top of 
 the one on the tablfe and, picking up both, he adroitly places 
 the empty envelope under his coat and turns around with 
 the nest of envelopes in his hand, bringing it to the gentleman 
 the spectators have decided upon. It is to be understood 
 that the assistant must be clever enough to change the en- 
 velopes in a second's time without being detected in the act. 
 The trick, which is now practically done, is then brought 
 to the conclusion described. If presented with the neces- 
 sary amount of address, it will not fail to bring the per- 
 former a hearty round of applause. 
 
 The Ubiquitons Card. 
 
 FAVORITE trick with conjurers is to discover a 
 selected card, that has been shuffled back into the 
 pack, at any number, counted from the top of the 
 'cards, that a spectator choses. 
 The method that I am about to explain, besides being 
 superior to tne older forms of the trick, has the advantage 
 that it is entirely unknown. As usual, after the selected 
 card has been returned to the pack, the pass is made *and 
 the card is brought to the top. After having given the cards 
 a False Shuffle, the conjurer asks at what number the spec- 
 tators wish him to find the chosen card. We will suppose 
 that Fifteen is the number told to him. Holding the pack 
 in his hand, he counts "One" and transfers the top card, 
 which is the desired one, to the right hand, seizing it between 
 the first and second fingers. The next card is transferred 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 103 
 
 to the right and placed above the card already there, the tip 
 of the first finger being used as a division between the two 
 cards. In this manner, the other cards are successively 
 counted into the right hand, counting until the number thir- 
 teen is reached. At this stage, the performer, instead of 
 taking the top card of the pack, leaves the selected card 
 which is at the bottom of the ones in his right hand, on top 
 of the pack, this movement being made to exactly resemble 
 that of taking off a card. It ought to be well practiced and, 
 if properly executed, will be found very illusive. Counting 
 "Fourteen," at the execution of this sleight, the performer 
 states that the next card is the fifteenth one, which ought to 
 prove the selected card, and requests the gentleman to name 
 his card. He does so, whereupon the performer turns over 
 the top card of the pack and shows it to be the desired one. 
 
 Four Cards Cauifht At The Finger Tips, 
 
 P|^j||OUR cards, after being selected, are returned to the 
 ^iBn!^ pack which, after being shuffled, is handed to a 
 ^^^^^ spectator with the request to throw the pack into 
 the air, causing the cards to separate and come 
 down in a shower. Reaching with both hands among the 
 descending cards, the performer catches two of the selected 
 cards at the finger tips of each hand, as shown in Figs. 56 
 and 57. 
 
 Difficult as the trick may appear at first reading, it will, 
 however, be found quite simple when the explanation is 
 once understood. 
 
 In the first place, it is necessary to have duplicates of 
 two of the cards selected, the Five of Clubs and the Three 
 of Hearts, which are placed face to face and are concealed 
 in the pocket of the left coat tail. The duplicates of these 
 
104 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 FIIG. 56. 
 
 FIG. 57. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 105 
 
 cards are then forced and two more cards are selected, the 
 performer allowing the spectators full choice in the selec- 
 tion of the latter. The Five of Clubs and Three of Hearts 
 are first returned to the pack and the latter is then shuffled 
 
 FIG. 58. FIG. 59. 
 
 by a spectator to his heart's content. The next two cards, 
 in a supposed case the Ace of Clubs and Six of Hearts, are 
 
 FIG. 60. FIG. 61. 
 
 then returned to the pack, the performer immediately mak- 
 in the pass and bringing both of them to the top of the pack, 
 after which operation he palms them off and allows the pack 
 to be shuffled once more. Then requesting a spectator to 
 throw the cards into the air at the word of command, he takes 
 his position in readiness to catch the falling cards, and 
 places his left arm behind him, as if to have it out of the 
 way. Instructing the spectator how to hold the cards, so 
 that when they are tossed up they will scatter properly, the 
 performer, with his left hand, the finger tips of which he 
 has previously moistened, takes the two cards out of the 
 coat pocket and counts ''One I Two I Three!" At ''Three," 
 
106 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 the spectator tosses up the pack as instructed, the conjurer 
 reaches with both hands among the descending cards and 
 produces the chosen* cards, adhering to his fingers on ac- 
 count of their having been previously moistened. 
 
 As some performers will find it difficult to cause the 
 cards to adhere by this method, I suggest that, just before 
 the experiment, a little powdered rosin, a small quantity of 
 which can be lying on the table, be rubbed on the thumb 
 and middle finger of each hand. By this plan, the cards are 
 certain to adhere. 
 
 Another version of this trick dispenses with the specta- 
 tor's help. The two cards not froced, that is, the Ace of 
 Clubs and Six of Hearts, are left at the top of the pack, after 
 the latter has b^en given a false shuffle by the performer. 
 The top card is then brought to the bottom of the pack, be- 
 ing turned over during the operation. The conjurer then 
 seizes the pack beween the middle finger and thumb 
 of the right hand and, pressing firmly with these fingers, 
 throws the pack into the air, the top and bottom cards be- 
 ing retained in" the hand, while the other hand (which, 
 meanwhile, has obtained possession of the two cards con- 
 cealed in the coat tail pocket) reaches among the falling cards 
 and pretends to pick out the selected cards from among 
 them. 
 
 THE CARD, RIBBOIS^ AND ENVELOPE. 
 
 |PTER showing an unprepared pack of cards, the 
 conjurer has one of them selected, say the Ten 
 of Spades, asking the spectator to mark the card 
 on its face with a pencil. While this is being 
 done and the attention of the company drawn to the person, 
 the performer contrives, without being observed, to attach 
 a small pellet of adhesive wax to the back of the top card 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 lo: 
 
 of the pack. Requesting the gentleman to return his card, 
 he offers him- the pack, at the same moment making the 
 pass, thereby causing the person to place his card directly 
 on the prepared former top card, which we will suppose is 
 the Jack of Diamonds. Squaring up the pack and pressing 
 it well together, so as to cause the two cards to adhere and 
 appear as one, the conjurer advances towards the spectator, 
 spreads out the pack and forces him to select the double 
 card. However, he does not permit him to remove this card, 
 but simply requests him to indicate it. Seizing this card 
 
 FIG. 62. , 
 himself and showing it to be the Jack of Diamonds, the per- 
 former places the pack aside and taking a sharp penknife, 
 pierces the center of the: double card and threads it on a silk 
 ribbon, which should be about one-fourth of an inch in width 
 and about three yards long. 
 
 Requesting two spectators to assist him, he gives each 
 of them one end of the ribbon to hold and covers the card, 
 which is threaded on the latter, with a large handkerchief. 
 Introducing his hand under it, he separates the two cards, 
 and placing his hand oyer the Jack of Diamonds, in the 
 same manner as in palming, moves the hand, and with it 
 the card, along the ribbon. It is an easy matter for him to 
 remove the card from the ribbon by simply taking one end 
 of it and, under the pretext of transfering it to the specta- 
 tor's other hand, slipping off and retaining the card palmed. 
 He next introduces a sealed envelope, which he proves to be 
 empty by holding it in front of a candle, thus allowing the 
 
108 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 audience to see through it. On the back of the envelope, a 
 small quantity of adhesive wax has previously been placed, 
 which enables the performer to secretly attach the palmed 
 Jack of Diamonds. 
 
 The attention of the spectators is noW called to the fact 
 that the Jack of Diamonds is threaded on the ribbon and 
 that the selected card, the Ten of Spades, is contained in 
 the pack. A change is then commanded to take place. Upon 
 removal of the handkerchief from the ribbon, the marked 
 Ten of Spades is found instead of the Jack of Diamonds. 
 Then showing his hands to be quite empty, the artist takes 
 the envelope, which during this time has been standing up- 
 right against the candlestick, and tear^ off the end. Blow- 
 ing into the envelope so as to cause it to expand, he appar- 
 ently shakes the Jack of Diamonds out of it, the card really 
 coming from the rear of the envelope. If neatly done, this 
 will be found a very illusive effect. 
 
 Faeilis DescenH^s Averno. 
 
 |N this invention of the celebrated Prof. Conradi, the per- 
 former introduces a transparent glass case into which 
 Wm he places an ordinary pack of thirty -two. cards, pre- 
 viously examined and shuffled by the company. The 
 glass case is placed upright on a minature glass top table, 
 which stands on one of the regular side tables. Pig. 63. 
 Any card whatever, that the spectators now name, will, 
 at the performer's command, visibly rise out of the shuffled 
 pack in the case, the conjurer remaining in the audience 
 during the operation. The card is removed from the case 
 and the same experiment is repeated, as often as desired, 
 with any of the cards remaining in the case. 
 
 The construction of the apparatus required for the per- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 109 
 
 formance of this trick is a complicated one. In the first 
 place, the upright or leg, to which the glass top is secured, 
 is a metal tube, the inside diameter of which is just large 
 enough to admit a folded card, prepared in the same way 
 as the card that passes into a narrow necked bottle. Fig. 176. 
 In the center of the glass top, a hole of the same diameter 
 as that of the inside of the tube is drilled and ground. The 
 glass top stand is placed on a side table, the drapery 
 
 ^...^ 
 
 ^BW'T'Tfl^SSeni 
 
 
 ^J'^. 
 
 PIG. 63. 
 around the bottom of which is about six inches deep. In 
 the top of this table, a hole is cut, of the same size as that 
 in the glass top. The center of this table top is sunk a 
 little, to allow the round base of the glass top stand to be 
 easily placed in a correct position. 
 
 Under the top of the table is attached a drum, divided 
 equally into thirty- two compartments, open at the top and 
 bottom. 
 
 By means of a clock work mechanism this drum can 
 be revolved, bringing each one of its compartments success- 
 ively under the hole in the table top. By means of a strong 
 
no NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 thread attached to an anchor stop, same as used in the con- 
 struction of Anchor watches, the assistant behind the scenes 
 is enabled to stop the drum at any compartment he desires. 
 Each of these compartments or chambers contains a metal 
 plunger, the upper end of the which has a clip soldered to it. 
 Into each clip is previously placed a different mechanical 
 card of the kind described, only the lower edge of the mid- 
 dle part of the card being held by the clip. By means of a 
 piston rod, contained in the hollow leg of the table, the 
 X)lunger of that jjarticular chamber that happens to be di- 
 rectly under the hole in the table top, is pushed upwards, 
 through the rod of the glass top stand and in the hole in the 
 glass. The folded card attached to the clip of the plunger 
 is thus brought directly behind the glass case on the stand. 
 The moment the card passes through the hole in the glass, 
 it expands, the piston continuing for a distance of nearly 
 three inches in its upward movement, thus causing the card 
 to apparently rise out of the pack. The performer takes it out 
 of the clip, which together with the plunger sinks back into 
 the table, according to the manipulation of a thread in the 
 assistant's hands. 
 
 Witnessed from behind the scenes, the trick proceeds in 
 the following manner. After the conjurer has put the ex- 
 amined and shuffled pack into the glass* card case on the 
 glass top stand, he advances to the company, inviting some 
 one to name any card that he would like to have rise out of 
 pack. As soon as a card has been decided upon, the assist- 
 ant who can plainly see the revolving drum, the back of 
 the table being devoid of drapery, sets the latter in motion 
 by releasing the stop. When the drum has revolved far enough 
 for the compartment containing the desired card, to come 
 under the hole in the table top, the anchor stop is made to 
 snap back into place, thus stopping the revolution of the 
 drum. By pulling the cord, operating the piston he causes 
 the latter to rise, carrying with it the plunger containing 
 the desired card, which subsequently appears to rise out of 
 the case. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. lU 
 
 THE QBE I) I ANT €ARI). 
 
 jLTHOUGH the effect of the trick, that I am about 
 to explain, is practically the same as that of Con- 
 radi's Pacilis Descensus Averno, an entirely dif- 
 ferent and much simpler plan is employed. We 
 dispense with all mechanism, nothing being required in the 
 way of properties, but two packs of cards, a Card Receptacle 
 (Pig. 31) and a black thread, which is stretched horizontally 
 across the stage. One of the packs, each card of which is 
 provided with two small cardboard hooks or strips glued to 
 its back (vide ' 'The Queen of the Air") is distributed in suits 
 in the four divisions of the Receptacle, which is then con- 
 cealed in its usual place, in the profonde. While the remain- 
 ing unprepared pack is being shuffled, the conjurer asks 
 some one to name a card that he wishes to have rise from 
 the pack. As soon as the name of the card has been men- 
 tioned, the performer secretly obtains a similar card from 
 the Receptacle, palms it and places it on the top of the 
 pack after the latter has been returned to him. In inserting 
 the card in a glass case or goblet, he secretly slips the thread, 
 which the assistant has lowered for the j)urpose, under the 
 hooks in the back of the rear card. The desired card is 
 then told to rise out of the pack. At the word of command 
 the assistant slowly pulls the thread,' causing the rear card 
 to issue from the glass. This trick can be repeated several 
 times, the performer taking the pack out of the case on 
 each occasion and under the pretext of having some one 
 shuffle the cards, in the meantime retains and palms the de- 
 sired card from the Receptacle. 
 
112 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The Card Appearing On The Hot tie. 
 
 jFTER exhibiting an unprepared bottle, from which 
 liquid is poured, the conjurer places it on the 
 table and then requests a spectator to select a 
 card, which is loaded into the Magic Pistol. Dis- 
 charging the latter at the bottle, the selected card is sud- 
 denly seen to make its appearance at the neck of the latter. 
 It is removed and together with the bottle passed out for in- 
 spection. 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 ^N this way of doing the trick, a contrivance is employed 
 which can be quickly attached to the edge of any ta- 
 ll ble, see Fig. 64. E is a square piece of metal, bent at 
 right angles. The upper half of E is slipped under 
 
 FIG. 64. 
 
 the loose cover of the table, which is turned under along 
 the rear edge. By means of a spring hinge, the bent wire, 
 A, is fastened to E. To the lower end of A, is soldered a 
 clip, B, which contains a duplicate of the card that the con- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. lia 
 
 jurer intends to force in the course of the trick. The ten- 
 dency of arm A, is to occupy the position indicated by the 
 dotted line in Fig. 65. It is, however, folded downwards, 
 being prevented from resuming its normal position by the 
 bolt, C, which is slipped over it. Fastened to C, is the 
 thread, D, which passes to the concealed assistant. 
 
 FIG. 65, 
 
 In standing the bottle on the table, the performer places 
 it directly over the center of E. At the report of the pistol 
 the assistant pulls the thread D, thereby causing bolt C to 
 slip back; arm A is released and instantly flies up against 
 the bottle, to the shape of which it is made to conform. 
 The card is then removed from the clip by the conjurer, who 
 takes the bottle away with a sliding motion towards the 
 front edge of the table, causing A to lie down on the top of 
 the latter. Its presence there cannot be noticed, it being 
 painted the same color as that of the table cover. 
 
 The Improved Torn Corner Card (Fig, 171) can be com* 
 bined with this trick to excellent advantage. For this pur- 
 pose, the usual black hood, to which a thread leading off to 
 the assistant is attached, is slipped over the upper comer of 
 
114 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 the card held by the clip, B. After the duplicate of the 
 card has been successfully forced, it is torn into small pieces, 
 one corner of which is retained by the spectator. 
 
 The remaining pieces are loaded into the pistol, which 
 is discharged at the bottle, upon the neck of which the re- 
 stored card, minus one corner which is apparently the one 
 retained, makes its appearance. 
 
 The conjurer requests the spectator to give him the 
 corner kept out and, making the pass with it, pretends to 
 throw it at the card on the neck of the bottle. At the same 
 moment, the assistant jerks off the hood covering the cor- 
 ner of the card, which, after being taken out of the clip, is 
 passed for inspection. 
 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 
 In this form of the trick, the necessary apparatus, which 
 consists of a metal tube about four inches in length, is con- 
 cealed in the neck of the bottle. This tube contains a metal 
 disc, which is pushed upwards by a spiral spring under- 
 neath it. To the center of this disc is soldered a clip which 
 holds a folding card (Fig. 176), same as used for passing in- 
 to a bottle. The disc is then pushed down as far as it will 
 go, when a small catch, to which a thread is fastened, springs 
 into place and prevents the disc from flying upwards again. 
 This small apparatus, as I have already said, fits in the neck 
 of the bottle, being prevented from falling on the inside by 
 a small rim or flange, turned on its upper edge. Previous 
 to the trick, the tube lies concealed on the servante, from 
 which the conjurer obtains it after the bottle has been un- 
 corked, After the palmed tube has been secretly slipped 
 into the neck of the bottle, a duplicate of the folding card 
 is forced and loaded into the pistol, which is fired at the 
 bottle. At the same time the assistant, who is holding the 
 thread attached to the catch of the tube, pulls it, whereby 
 the disc becomes released and is carried upwards by the 
 spring, causing the card, which expands as soon as it is 
 outside of the bottle, to appear at its neck. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 115 
 
 The Card Ofi The Table Edge. 
 
 |S THE title indicates a selected card mysteriously 
 appears on the rear edge of the table. The ap- 
 paratus employed for this trick is practically of 
 same construction as the one used in the first 
 method of the Card and Bottle Trick. It consists of a metal 
 plate, Fig. 66, which by means of the sharp points A A A is 
 securely attached to the lower surface and near the rear 
 
 FIG. 66. 
 
 edge of the table. D is a spring hinge, B a metal arm, the 
 lower end of which ends in the clip C, which holds the card, 
 the conjurer wishes to use for the experiment. Arm B 
 and with it the duplicate card are folded flat under the metal 
 plate, being held in place by bolt F, to which the thread E 
 leading to the assistant, is fastened. It will be apparent 
 that this apparatus can be attached to the lower side of a 
 table with a very thin top, without its presence being 
 noticed. At the moment the performer desires the card to 
 appear, the assistant draws the bolt F by pulling the thread 
 E. The arm B, which in our illustration is shown in the 
 
116 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 act of turning over, flies upwards and folds against the Tear 
 edge of the table, causing the selected card to appear as de- 
 sired. It is then taken out of the clip and passed for inspec- 
 tion. 
 
 THE MYSTEBIES OF THE ZODIAC. 
 
 |LTHOUGH the experiment that I am about to ex- 
 plain, depends upon a mathematical principle, the 
 latter is so cleverly arranged and so exceedingly 
 well disguised by all sorts of pretexts,' that the 
 conjurer, who adds the feat to his repertory of parlor tricks, 
 need not have the slightest fear of any spectator, no matter 
 how astute, discovering or even being able to explain the 
 modus operandi. 
 
 We have in the line of conjuring, a number of clever feats, 
 depending upon mathematical principles, which feats com- 
 pared with the present one, pale into comparative insignifi- 
 cance. I have no doubt, with due deference to the intelli- 
 gence of those of my readers, who will master this feat, that 
 the majority of them will even fail to see the reason why the 
 peculiar result at the finish of the trick, is obtained. Para- 
 doxical as this may seem, it need however prevent no one 
 from learning to perform the mystery. For the sake 
 of clearness, we will suppose that one spectator, whom we 
 will call A, takes an active part in the course of the trick, 
 although in actual practice it will be found much more my s- 
 terious and effective, if all or at least the majority of spec- 
 tators participate. 
 
 The performer commences by explaining that the mys- 
 tery he is about to introduce, is a purely astrological one 
 and for this reason it will he necessary for him to know the 
 spectator's, (A's) birthday, by the aid of which after a mo- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 117 
 
 ment" s calculation, he tells A the name of the playing" card, 
 which domineers A's career or to use the proper astrological 
 term, tells the person's birth card, requesting him to bear it in 
 mind, as it will play an important part in the experiment 
 which is to follow. He next proceeds to execute on the table 
 tof) a drawing of the Zodiac depicted in Fig. 67, using a piece 
 
 FIG. 67. 
 of chalk for the purpose. To increase the mystery, he may 
 as indicated, place opposite each division of the Zodiac, the 
 name of the sign it represents. What is still better, is to 
 have in readiness a large sheet of white paper or oilcloth thus 
 marked. 
 
 Introducing a pack of fifty-two ordinary cards, he gives 
 them a thorough shuffiLe, inviting a spectator to cut them 
 (single cut) as many times as he may desire, then cutting the 
 cards himself in the improved style, described in the earlier 
 pages of this book. The spectators are next handed an or- 
 dinary die, with the request to throw it. Supposing that the 
 five comes uppermost, he takes the pack and places the four 
 cards on top of it, but without disturbing their order, face 
 downwards in the fifth division of the Zodiac. The next 
 four cards are placed in the sixth sign, the next four in the 
 seventh and so on up to sign Twelve, in which four cards are 
 laid. The next four cards are placed in Thirteen, the Sun, 
 
118 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 the next in One, and the remaining twelve cards are then 
 evenly distributed in heaps of four, in the second, third and 
 fourth divisions of the circle. This having been done, the 
 conjurer produces a sheet of paper, on which is neatly and 
 legibly written the following table, which, as it is identical 
 with a table used in the "Ne Plus Ultra Trick," we will 
 therefore call No. 3. 
 
 
 
 TABLE NO. 3. 
 
 
 
 
 1. 
 
 Ace of 
 
 Diamonds. 
 
 27. 
 
 Ace of Spades. 
 
 9 
 
 Two 
 
 
 28. 
 
 Two 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Three 
 
 
 29. 
 
 Three ' 
 
 
 4. 
 
 Four 
 
 
 30. 
 
 Four ' 
 
 
 5. 
 
 Five 
 
 
 31. 
 
 Five ' 
 
 
 9. 
 
 Six 
 
 
 32. 
 
 Six 
 
 
 7. 
 
 Seven 
 
 ( 4 * 
 
 33. 
 
 Seven ' 
 
 
 8. 
 
 Eight 
 
 
 34. 
 
 Eight ' 
 
 
 9. 
 
 Nine 
 
 " . : \ 
 
 35. 
 
 Nine ' 
 
 
 10. 
 
 Ten 
 
 
 36. 
 
 Ten 
 
 
 11. 
 
 Jack 
 
 
 37. 
 
 Jack ' 
 
 
 12. 
 
 Queen 
 
 
 38. 
 
 Queen ' 
 
 
 13. 
 
 King 
 Ace of 
 
 
 39. 
 
 King ' 
 
 
 14. 
 
 Clubs. 
 
 40. 
 
 Ace of Hearts 
 
 15. 
 
 Two 
 
 a 
 
 41. 
 
 Two 
 
 
 16. 
 
 Three 
 
 ii 
 
 42. 
 
 Three ' 
 
 
 17. 
 
 Four 
 
 li 
 
 43. 
 
 Four 
 
 
 18. 
 
 Five 
 
 I i 
 
 44. 
 
 Five 
 
 
 19. 
 
 Six 
 
 a 
 
 45. 
 
 Six 
 
 
 20. 
 
 Seven 
 
 i i 
 
 46. 
 
 Seven ' 
 
 
 21. 
 
 Eight 
 
 a 
 
 47. 
 
 Eight ' 
 
 
 22. 
 
 Nine 
 
 a 
 
 48. 
 
 Nine ' 
 
 
 23. 
 
 Ten 
 
 a 
 
 49. 
 
 Ten 
 
 
 24. 
 
 Jack 
 
 li 
 
 50. 
 
 Jack ' 
 
 
 25, 
 
 Queen 
 
 a 
 
 51. 
 
 Queen ' 
 
 
 26. 
 
 King 
 
 li 
 
 52. 
 
 King ' 
 
 
 He explains the law of this simple order of the cards, by 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 119 
 
 relating that when cards were first invented the four suits 
 represented the four seasons of the year: Diamonds (Rose) 
 being spring, Clubs (Trefoil) the summer, Spades (Acorn) 
 fall and Hearts (Cup) winter. (This is true in fact, 
 as in Spain this nomenclature still is used. ) Spectator A 
 who is willing to take part in the experiment, is invited to 
 take possession of the sheet, while the performer retires 
 to the furthest end of the room. From this point he dictates, 
 to A, whom he has provided with paper and pencil what he 
 desires him to do. He first requests A to think of a card 
 and then to find it in Table No. 3 in his possession. The 
 number preceding the card is to be put down and multipli- 
 ed by 33. To this result he is told to add the number of the 
 month, in which he was born. To this is to be added 7x7, 
 or as the performer states: ''There are seven days to the 
 week, which days are governed by seven principal planets. 
 These two numbers multiplied together make 49, which 
 kindly add to the sum already obtained. '" Next borrowing 
 some one's watch, he tells A to add to the total, the number of 
 minutes or seconds indicated by the watch, at the same time 
 requesting the owner of the latter to verify the number. To 
 the result thus obtained is then added A's birthday, that is 
 day of the month, the number of the month in which he was 
 born and finally the number of his birth card, which he has 
 been told before the experiment. For this purpose A is 
 told to look for his birth card in the Table No. 3 and to put 
 down its tabulated number. 
 
 This having been done, the spectator is requested to 
 divide the total by 52, (the number of weeks in the year). 
 The quotient obtained is to be disregarded, only the remain- 
 der to be kept and marked R, so that when the performer 
 has occasion to refer to R later on, the spectator will 
 linow what is meant To R, the gentleman is told to 
 add the name of the century, which for a few years to come 
 will be 19. The result obtained is to be divided by 4 (four 
 seasons of the year). To the quotient thereby obtained R is 
 to be added. The result of this addition is to be divided by 
 
120 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 5 (the number of one's senses). This will result in a quo- 
 tient, which say is 8 and a remainder, which we suppose, is 
 3. The performer then requests A take the third card in sign 
 8 of the Zodiac, and to his utmost astonishment, the specta- 
 tor finds it to be the very card of which he thought. If a 
 number of persons say, twelve, each having a different 
 birth day, birth month, birth card and thought card, partici- 
 pate in the experiment and at the end of it, each person 
 finds his card at the place, where the final quotient and re- 
 mainder indicates, the result will simply dumbfound them, 
 especially if they are people above, what may be called, ordi- 
 nary intelligence. 
 
 In order to undeceive my reader as quickly as possible, 
 I beg to state that the pack of cards used is prearranged in 
 the order set forth in Table No. 5, but as the cards are sub- 
 jected to a thorough but False Shuffle and Cut by the per- 
 former and also are repeatedly cut by the company, no one 
 will have the slightest idea, that the cards are laying in a 
 certain order. 
 
 Another point to be added to the deception of the spec- 
 tators, is that the conjurer in distributing the cards in heaps 
 of four in the Zodiac, begins, in the sign decided by the 
 throw of the die, which really is an unprepared one. Of 
 course one can dispense with the die, it being used for the 
 effect only, the idea to create the impression of chance com- 
 bined with astrology being at the bottom of this mystery. 
 It is for this reason, that I have placed in parenthesis, be- 
 hind each numerical dictation, a plausible reason for the 
 division or addition, and cannot too strongly urge my readers 
 to resort to these expedients, thus misleading the company 
 as much as possible from the true secret of the feat. 
 
 ' ''But how about the number of minutes shown by the 
 watch, that you dictated to me, when you performed this 
 experiment for my benefit" some of my personal, profess- 
 ional friends will ask: Ah! there is the rub, my friends, when 
 I distributed the cards in the Zodic, I secretly looked at the 
 bottom card of division 13, technically known as the Sun 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 121 
 
 Card and then without being observed, referred to the Table 
 No. 5 which I had written on a small card and palmed in my 
 hand. Supposing that the Sun Card was the Ten of Clubs. 
 
 FIG. 68. 
 Quickly finding the Ten of Clubs in Table No. 5, I noticed 
 the number (21) behind it, kept this in mind and dictated it 
 to you a moment later as the number of minutes or sec- 
 onds. " 
 
 TABLE NO. 5. 
 The Nine of Clubs (face downwards) is the top card of the pack. 
 
 9 C. 
 
 2 
 
 9 S. 
 
 .41 
 
 9 H. 
 
 .28 
 
 9 D. 
 
 .15 
 
 JD. 
 
 . 1 
 
 J C. 
 
 .40 
 
 J S. 
 
 .27 
 
 JH. 
 
 .14 
 
 •^K H 
 
 .52 
 
 KD. 
 
 .39 
 
 KC. 
 
 .26 
 
 KS. 
 
 .13 
 
 2H. 
 
 .51 
 
 2 D. 
 
 .38 
 
 2 C. 
 
 .25 
 
 2 C. 
 
 .12 
 
 4 S. 
 
 .50 
 
 4 H. 
 
 .37 
 
 4 D. 
 
 .24 
 
 4 C. 
 
 .11 
 
 6 C. 
 
 .49 
 
 6 S. 
 
 .36 
 
 6 H. 
 
 .23 
 
 6 D. 
 
 .10 
 
 H D. 
 
 .48 
 
 8 C. 
 
 .35 
 
 8 S. 
 
 .22 
 
 8 H. 
 
 . 9 
 
 10 H 
 
 .47 
 
 10 D 
 
 .34 
 
 IOC. 
 
 .21 
 
 lOS. 
 
 . 8 
 
 QS. 
 
 .46 
 
 QH. 
 
 .33 
 
 QD. 
 
 .20 
 
 QC. 
 
 . / 
 
 AS. 
 
 .45 
 
 A H 
 
 .32 
 
 AD. 
 
 .19 
 
 AC. 
 
 . 6 
 
 n c. 
 
 .44 
 
 3 S. 
 
 .31 
 
 3 H. 
 
 .18 
 
 3 D. 
 
 . 5 
 
 5 D. 
 
 .43 
 
 5 C. 
 
 .30 
 
 5 S. 
 
 .17 
 
 5 H. 
 
 . 4 
 
 7 H. 
 
 .42 
 
 7 D. 
 
 .29 
 
 7 C. 
 
 .16 
 
 7 S. 
 
 . 3 
 
 As the watch is borrowed, the performer notices if the 
 number of minutes or hours agrees with the number indicat- 
 ed by the Sun Card. Sometimes both correspond, some- 
 times the watch lacks a minute or two, in which case the 
 conjurer occupies the required amount of time by dictating 
 
122 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 all the other numbers first. If neither the hour nor the 
 minutes will furnish the desired excuse for the dictation of 
 the number of the Sun Card, the performer waits until the 
 second hand approaches the right number. Then showing- 
 the watch to the gentleman from whom it has been borrowed, 
 the conjurer exclaims : ' 'The seconds are twenty -one, are they 
 not?'' and by that time, the second hand having arrived at 
 twenty-one, the gentleman therefore corroborates the per- 
 former's statement. 
 
 The only thing that still remains to be explained is the 
 figuring out of the birth card. This is also easy, for all 
 that is required is to double the number of the month in 
 which the person is born, then add to this the day of birth 
 and subtract the total from fifty-five. 
 
 Example: Birth card for the 5th of April (4th month). 
 Double number of month, 2 X 4= 8 
 Add the day of the month, 84-5=13 
 Subtract total from 55, 55 — 18=42 
 
 42, according to Table No. 3, is the Two of Hearts, which 
 is the birth card. 
 
 Another example: December 10th (12th month). 
 12x2=24 
 24+10=84 
 
 55— 84=21=Eight of Clubs. 
 Last example: June 24th (June is the 6th month). 
 6x2=12 
 12+24=86 
 55— 86=19=Six of Clubs. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 123 
 
 I shall next give several examples of the entire process 
 of figuring, knowing that they will materially assist my 
 readers in learning the experiment, which is not nearly as 
 difficult as it appears at first glance. 
 
 Date of person's birth, February 9th; ergo, birth card, 
 Two of Hearts, or 42. The Thought Card 27, the Ace of 
 Spades. Sun Card, Six of Spades (36 minutes). 
 
 Multiply Thought Card by 33=981 
 Add month of birth, 
 
 " Days of Week, Planets, 
 
 " Minutes, 
 
 '' Birth Card, - 
 
 '' Birthday, 
 
 '' Month of Birth, 
 
 2 
 49 
 36 
 42 
 
 9 
 
 Divide by 52 weeks, 
 
 52 J 1030 1 19 
 52 
 
 510 
 468 
 
 42=R. 
 Add Century, 19 
 
 Divide by 4 seasons, 4 j 61=15 
 Add remainder, +42 
 
 Divide by 5 senses, 
 Remainder, 
 
 5 i 57=11 Sign of Zodiac. 
 55 
 
 2 No. of Card in Sisrn. 
 
124 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 Second example: 
 
 Date of Person's Birth, July 15th. Thought Card 49, 
 Ten of Hearts. Sun Card, Five of Hearts (4 minutes. ) 
 
 Thought Card, 49x33=1617 
 
 Add Birth Month, 7 
 
 7x7 - 49 
 
 Minutes, 4 
 
 Birth Card, 26 
 
 Birthday, 15 
 
 Birth Month, 7 
 
 Divide fcy 52 Weeks, 52 J 1725 [ 33 
 
 156 
 
 165 
 156 
 
 9=R. 
 
 Add Century, 19 
 
 Divide by 4 Seasons, 4 J 28=7 
 Add Remainder, 9 
 
 Divide by 5 Senses, 5 J 16=?3==SigTi. 
 
 15 
 
 Remainder, l=Card. 
 
^ 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 125 
 
 THE CABDS, COINS AND GLASS. 
 
 iFTER a tumbler and a pack of cards have been 
 subjected to close examination, the glass is placed 
 on the table, the pack of cards being then laid 
 over the top of it, thus shutting out all access to 
 the interior of the glass. The conjurer borrows a few coins, 
 usually half dollars, and proceeds to pass them through the 
 cards into the glass, into which the coins are seen and heard 
 to drop. 
 
 Several years ago, the effect was accomplished by the 
 use of mechanical packs, which however of late years has 
 gone out of fashion, owing to the greatly simplified methods 
 of performing the trick that have been invented since then. 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 ]HIS FORM of the trick is the simplest imaginable, 
 a description of it being given here, for the 
 sake of completeness only. After having placed 
 the glass on the table, the conjurer obtains from 
 the servante or from his pochette, a half dollar, which he 
 
 vsecretly places on the bottom of the pack, holding the latter 
 by one of its ends with the top card turned towards the com- 
 pany, the coin being held on the rear side of the pack by the 
 thumb, the fingers resting on the other side of the pack, 
 
126 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 which the performer now places on the glass Fig. 70, slip- 
 ping the coin between the edge of the latter and the cards. 
 The whole is next covered by a handkerchief, apparently to 
 make the trick the more difficult, but in reality to prevent 
 the spectator from seeing where the coin comes from, when 
 it falls into the glass. The conjurer then borrows a half 
 dollar and pretends to transfer it from the right hand into the 
 left, really retaining it in the right, with which he seizes 
 his wand placing it on the end of the pack opposite to the 
 one under which the coin is concealed. Holding the closed 
 left hand above the pack, he suddenly opens it and hits the 
 upper end of the wand a gentle tap whereby the end of the 
 pack holding the coin against the glass, tilts up and releases 
 the coin, which drops into the glass and is removed by the 
 performer, who after substituting for it the coin he has 
 palmed, returns the latter to its owner. 
 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 
 The plan employed in this version of the trick is a very 
 ingenious one indeed. 
 
 In one of the cards of the pack, previous to the perfor- 
 mance, four slits A B and C D, are cut with a sharp pen- 
 knife. The distance between B and C must be adapted to 
 admit of a half dollar being placed into the slits, as shown 
 in Fig. 71, being held neither too loosely or too firmly. The 
 card and coin thus prepared is placed in the second one from 
 the bottom of the pack, which may now be freely spread 
 out, fan like, and shown from both sides, the performer ex- 
 ercising a little care not to expose the prepared card. Just 
 before placing the pack on the tumbler, he removes the bot- 
 tom card and places it on the top of the pack. Taking the 
 borrow coin, and pretending to place it in his left hand, in 
 reality keeping it palmed in the right, with which he seizes 
 the wand, he holds the latter in a vertical position, its lower 
 end resting on the pack. The closed left hand then strikes 
 the upper end of the wand a quick blow, causing the pack 
 to bend inward a trifle, thereby forcing the concealed coin 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. . 
 
 12\ 
 
 out of the slits, causing it to drop visibly and audibly into 
 the tumbler with very pretty effect. The left hand as it 
 strikes the wand is opened and shown to be empty. 
 
 FIG. 72. 
 Our second diagram Fig. 72, shows a plan by which two 
 coins are held by the slits A B, C D, E F, G H, made in the 
 
12^ . NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 bottom card. By this method one coin at a time is made to 
 apparently drop through the pack into the tumbler under- 
 neath; the performer for this purpose applying the lower 
 end of the wand to one end of the pack and dislodging the 
 coin held there, afterwards moving the wand to the other end 
 and releasing the second and last coin in a similar manner. 
 THIRD METHOD 
 
 This version of the trick differs materially from the 
 methods just described, as during the course of the trick 
 the magician stands at some distance from the glass and 
 while in this position, invites a spectator to come forward 
 
 FIG. 73. 
 and examine cards, glass and coins, proving the absence of 
 preparation. The table on which the tumbler is placed must 
 be either a regular conjuring table with a bellows or box top 
 or if the latter is not available, a parlor table with a partly 
 open drawer may be used. Pace downwards on the table 
 lies a card, the back of which is painted the same color as 
 the table top. To the edge of this card is attached 'a black 
 silk thread A, Fig. 73 about fourteen inches in length, which 
 is firmly tied to a small ring C, to which also is secured a 
 black, elastic cord B, the end of which is fastened to the in- 
 side of the table or table drawer. To set this combination 
 of thread, ring and elastic, the latter is drawn out to its 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 129 
 
 full tension, and prevented from flying back by the needle 
 C, which is driven partly into the top of the table. To the 
 eye of this needle is fastened another thread D which is 
 either passed behind the scenes to the assistant or may be 
 secured to the performer's wand, which is lying on the table. 
 
 After having borrowed, two half dollars, which for the 
 sake of better effect he causes to be marked, by the owners, 
 the performer apparently places them in some conspicious 
 place, where they may be seen until the moment they are 
 required. What he has done however, is to substitute for 
 the borrowed coins two of his own, keeping the original ones 
 concealed in his hand. 
 
 Having shown the glass and cards, he places the latter 
 directly in front of the prepared card on the table and, hold- 
 it in such a way that the spectators cannot see behind it, he 
 secretly places the palmed coins beside each other on the 
 prepared card and then places th e cards on it. He now^ picks up 
 the pack and prepared card and with them the coins, placing 
 them evenly on the glass. Taking the other two coins, 
 which the spectators believe to be the borrowed ones, he 
 makes the pass with them and pretends to throw them into 
 the glass. At this moment, the thread D must be pulled, 
 either by the assistant or by the performer himself, with the 
 attached wand, thereby pulling the needle out of the table 
 top. This releases the ring E and the elastic, with great 
 rapidity, recedes within the table, carrying with it ring, 
 thread and card P, which is so quickly jerked from below 
 the pack that the coins underneath, on account of their in- 
 ertia, do not accompany the card, but fall directly into the 
 glass. As all preparation has vanished into the interior of 
 the table with the elastic, the performer generally requests 
 some spectator to come up and inspect cards, glass and 
 coins, which are, by the marks on them, identified as the 
 the borrowed ones. 
 
 CS2 
 
130 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 THE HALVJEI) CABD. 
 
 OR this excellent trick, in which a destroyed card is 
 m magically restored, the performer prepares him- 
 ihid self by previously cutting a card, say the Six of 
 Diamonds, into two parts, one of which he discards, 
 concealing the other part (B, Pig. 82) about his person. 
 
 After having forced a duplicate of this card (A, .Fig. 83) 
 
 ♦ 
 
 f 
 
 FIG. 82. 
 
 he places the pack on the table, using this opportunity 
 to secretly obtain possession of the half card B, which he 
 places on the selected card, the two presenting the appear- 
 ance indicated in Fig. 83. Holding both cards well to- 
 gether, he takes a pair of scissors and cuts A in two, follow- 
 ing exactly the line of B. The upper part of A is given in 
 charge of some one and the double half card shown from 
 both sides. B is then substituted for the lower half of A, by 
 means of the Excelsior Change. The upper half of A and 
 the part B are then matched, and found fitting together, ap- 
 parently proving that they are really portions of the same 
 card. Part B is now destroyed by setting fire to it, and then 
 apparently restored by exhibiting in its stead the lower half 
 of the original card A. 
 
 Those of my readers who do not mind a little extra ex- 
 pense or trouble, can bring the trick to a more sensa- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 131 
 
 tional close by dropping the palmed half of A on the ser- 
 vante, from where it is removed by the assistant, who takes 
 it behind the scenes and quickly encloses it in an envelope, 
 which he seals and encloses in a second larger envelope, 
 sealing this, and so on, until the half card is contained in a 
 nest of six or more envelopes. This set of envelopes he 
 hands to a District Messenger Boy, who is in waiting and 
 who quickly runs out of the entrance of the theatre and, en- 
 tering from the front of the house, hands the nest of en- 
 velopes to the spectator to whom it is addressed. The gentle - 
 
 FIG. 83. 
 
 man, at the conjurer's request, opens one envelope after the 
 other and, inside of the innermost, discovers half of the 
 card A, which exactly fits the other half in his possession. 
 While the assistant is occupied in getting the envelopes 
 ready, the performer, by dint of a little by- play, fills out the 
 necessary time by burning B and causing its ashes to disap- 
 pear. 
 
 If this additional effect, of using the Nest of Envelopes, 
 
132 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 is introduced, it is advisable to have the gentleman who se- 
 lects the Six of Diamonds, place a private mark on each end 
 of the card, so that at the linish of the trick, there can be 
 no lingering doubt but that the restored half is really part 
 of the card originally chosen. 
 
 THE PHOENIX. 
 
 IHE admirable trick of this name resembles in effect 
 and principle the trick just described. After a card 
 has been selected, the performer places it aside 
 and proceeds to tear off a corner of the card, 
 which had best be a court card, say the King of Diamonds. 
 Then handing the very same corner and the card to another 
 spectator, he requests him to take charge of the corner until 
 it is wanted. This card itself is then placed on an unpre- 
 pared china plate and set on fire by a spectator or the per- 
 former, who previously begs the spectator to compare the 
 corner with the card, which are found to match exactly. 
 After the card has been consumed by the flames, the con- 
 jurer places the ashes in any piece of apparatus, say for in- 
 stance the Card Box and closing it, gives it to a second spec- 
 tator to hold. The burnt card is now commanded to become 
 completely restored, the box is opened and the performer's 
 wishes found to have been obeyed. Instead of the ashes 
 placed in the box, is found the original King of Diamonds 
 minus a corner. The card is passed to the spectator who 
 retained the corner and they are found to fit exactly. 
 
 In order to be able to perform tiiis capital trick, it is 
 necessary to have a duplicate King of Diamonds, from 
 which the upper corner has been previously torn and de- 
 stroyed, as it is not required in the course of the trick. The 
 card itself is secreted in the pochette or any other^easily 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 133 
 
 accessible place on the person of the performer, who thus 
 prepared advances with the pack and adroitly forces the 
 second King of Diamonds. In the act of placing the pack, 
 for which there is no further need, on the table, he obtains 
 possession of the card concealed in his pocket, palming it 
 face downwards, in the right hand. Receiving with the 
 left hand the selected King of Diamonds, he places the right 
 hand over it leaving the palmed card on top. Holding both 
 as one card, he deliberately tears off a corner of the selected 
 King, carefully following while doing so, the exact form of 
 the tear in the other card. Handing the piece just torn off 
 to a spectator, he shows the double card, which the com- 
 pany believes to be only one, and then making the Excelsior 
 Change, exhibits the duplicate King of Diamonds in place of 
 the chosen one. The corner may be safely applied to this 
 duplicate card, without any danger of the substitution being 
 suspected. The duplicate card is then burned as described, 
 the palmed original card be found in any place optional 
 with the conjurer. 
 
 % 
 
 The Lost Ace. 
 
 iPTER introducing a pack of unprepared cards, the 
 performer removes the four Aces from it and lays 
 them on the table in plain sight. The remaining 
 cards are then handed to a spectator with the re- 
 quest to convince himself that no duplicate Aces are con- 
 tained therein. After this has been done, the conjurer picks 
 up the four Aces and requests the gentleman to shuffle them 
 into the pack. Upon asking the spectator whether he is 
 sure that he has the Aces in his possession and being an- 
 swered in the affirmative, the performer reaches into his 
 pocket and produces from there the Ace of Diamonds, which, 
 upon inspection of the pack, is found missing. 
 
134 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 Previous to the introduction of the trick, the artist re- 
 moves from the pack the Ace of Diamonds, which he places 
 in the tail pocket of his coat. The cards laid on the table 
 consist of three Aces and the Nine of Diamond, which is 
 
 
 ♦ ^ 
 
 ♦ 
 
 4 
 
 ,.♦ 
 
 ♦li 
 
 FIG. 
 
 85. 
 
 used as a substitute for the missing Ace of the same suit. 
 To conceal the side pips of this card, the Ace of Clubs and 
 Ace of Spades are made to cover it, as indicated in Fig. 86. 
 By a little practice this can be done in an apparently care- 
 less manner of arranging the cards on the table, and finally 
 placing the Ace of Hearts over them. 
 
 FIG. 86. 
 
 The trick then proceeds as described, the four cards 
 (supposed to be four Aces) being shuffled into the pack, after 
 which operation, the Ace of Diamonds having vanished 
 from the pack, is produced from the performer's pocket. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 13o 
 
 Thought Foretold, 
 
 ]HE performer commences the experiment by hand- 
 ing to a spectator a sealed envelope, with the re- 
 quest to take charge of it until it is wanted. He 
 then introduces a piquet pack of thirty- two cards 
 and, after shuffling it, divides it into four heaps of eight 
 cards each, arranging these heaps on a tray, over which a 
 borrowed handkerchief is then spread. Turning his back to 
 the tray, the conjurer invites another gentleman to remove 
 from underneath the handkerchief, any one of the four heaps 
 and retain it in his possession. 
 
 After his request has been complied with, he turns 
 around, seizes the gentleman's hand and, while pretending 
 to read his thoughts, proceeds to write on a blackboard the 
 names of the cards contained in the selected heap. He 
 then asks for the return of the envelope, which he opens 
 and from which he removes a slip of paper, also bearing 
 the names of the eight cards that were chosen. 
 
 The cards used have been prearranged. Every eighth 
 card is a trifle wider than the rest. After having given the 
 pack a False Shuffle, the performer makes the pass at a 
 wide card and diVides them into four heaps on the tray. In 
 doing so, he secretly obtains a glimpse of the bottom card, 
 and from that can easily calculate the names of the cards 
 contained in each heap. After one of these heaps has been 
 removed from the tray, he can easily tell, by glancing at the 
 tray, which packet is missing, the handerchief being sunk 
 down in the place formerly occupied by the cards. Know- 
 ing the names of them, thanks to their prearranged order, 
 he proceeds to write on the blackboard the names of the 
 cards. 
 
 The envelope contains a slip of paper on which are 
 written the names of the first eight cards of the prepared 
 I)ack, and also a second smaller envelope, which again con- 
 tains another slip with the names of the next eiglit cards 
 and a third, still smaller envelope. This is 'similarly ar- 
 
136 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 ranged, containg a third slip and a fourth envelope, with a 
 slip bearing the names of the last eight cards. Owing to 
 this peculiar arrangement, the conjurer has it in his power 
 to produce from the envelope or envelopes, as the case may 
 be, any one of the four slips. Supposing the first eight 
 cards to have been chosen, he simply opens the first envel- 
 ope and, neglecting the envelope within, removes the- slip, 
 which he hands to a spectator, requesting him to read aloud 
 the list of cards thereon. The envelope and its contents, in 
 this case, are carelessly thrown aside. 
 
 If however, the third set of cards has been chosen, the 
 performer would open the first envelope, pay no attention 
 to the slip it contains, but would remove the second envel- 
 ope. Opening this one and ignoring the slip it contained, he 
 would take the third envelope, from which he would remove 
 the slip only, placing the last envelope shown aside, as if 
 it were of no further importance. 
 
 THE PIERCED CABt). 
 
 ALTHOUGH the effect of this trick, upon perusal of 
 the explanation, appears to be simple, it is, never- 
 theless, one of the most mysterious of modern, or 
 rather modernized, card tricks. 
 In the first place, the performer is securely blindfolded, 
 after which a gentleman selects any card from the pack, 
 then, taking possession of it, he replaces his card, shuffling 
 them as much as he pleases. The pack is then returned to 
 the conjurer, who carelessly throws it on the table, spread- 
 ing out the cards promiscuously with his hands. 
 
 A spectator is then asked for the loan of a penknife, 
 which is opened and handed to the performer, who grasps 
 it dagger-like and, circling with his hand above the cards. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 137 
 
 suddenly drives the point of the knife into one of them. Re- 
 questing the gentleman who selected the card to name it, he 
 turns up the knife with the card still adhering to it and 
 shows it to be the one selected. 
 
 The secret of the solution of this trick, which simply 
 dumbfounds the spectators, is as usual, simplicity itself. The 
 conjurer, himself, folds the handkerchief, which is to be 
 placed over his eyes, taking care that the folds are not too 
 wide, so that when he is blindfolded by it, he can easily see 
 underneath it, by glancing in a downward direction. The 
 idea of the performer being able to see under the blindfold, 
 never seems to strike the spectators, whose only care is 
 usually to select a handkerchief of a texture sufficiently close 
 to render it opaque when folded. 
 
 This having been done, the conjurer asks for the cards, 
 which are handed to him and allows a gentleman to 
 select any card that he wishes, requesting him to show the 
 card to the rest of the company, to avoid all possibilities of 
 a mistake being made. While his wish is being complied 
 with, he gives a sharp bend to the cards in his possession, 
 and handing them to the gentleman, asks him to replace the 
 card himself and after doing so to shuffle the pack thor- 
 oughly. No matter how much the pack is shuffled, the per- 
 former upon receiving it, can easily discover the chosen 
 card, it being the only straight one in the pack. He glances 
 under the blindfold, while asking some one to furnish him 
 with a knife. After he has located the card, he brings it to 
 the top by means of the pass and then throws the pack on 
 the table, immediately spreading it out thoroughly, using 
 both hands, taking care to keep the chosen card in view. 
 The finish of the trick then proceeds as already described, 
 the conjurer impaling one of the cards, which turns out to 
 be the one previously selected. 
 
 By slightly modifying the process, the effect of the 
 trick can be greatly increased by having three cards chosen 
 and piercing and displaying them successively. For this 
 purpose a somewhat different method is adopted- After the 
 
138 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 cards have been selected and are returned to the pack, 
 which the conjurer himself holds, he makes the pass at a 
 suitable moment, thereby bringing the cards to the top and 
 after palming them off by means of the Buatier Palm, allows 
 the pack to be shuffled. Upon its return, he secretly re- 
 places the palmed cards and spreads them on the table, ar- 
 ranging it so that the three cards are not situated suspic- 
 iously near one another, taking excellent care however to 
 remember their exact location. He must also bear in mind, 
 which one of them is the first card, which one the second 
 etc. The trick in this form, requires considerable audacity 
 and address on the part of the performer, who will certainly 
 be amply repaid for his trouble in mastering the trick, by 
 the great impression its performance creates. 
 
 THE CARD BOX. 
 
 NE of the most useful accessories in Card Conjuring 
 is the Card Box, Fig. 87, which is invaluable for 
 causing cards to appear, vanish or change into 
 others. To all appearances, it is but a plain 
 
 FIG. 87. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 139 
 
 box of polished wood, consisting of the parts A and B, 
 hinged together, either of which will serve as top or bottom 
 of the box. The inside is usually blackened; but there is 
 another part, not noticed by the spectators, and that is a 
 very thin slab, C, of blackened wood, nicely fitting the in- 
 side of the box, and which is held in place by one of the 
 fingers, as the performer freely shows the open box from 
 both sides, inverting it to prove that it contains nothing. 
 
 We will suppose for an illustration, that in B lies a card, 
 face downwards, being hidden by the slab C. The box thus 
 prepared, may be freely shown, apparently empty, as de- 
 scribed above, and then closed by means of lid A. (This, at 
 least, is the method usually adopted, although I, myself, let 
 A form the bottom of the box and adroitly close prepared 
 side B on it as the cover, by which process, I dispense with 
 the necessity of turning over the box.) In placing the 
 closed box upon the table, or giving it to some person to 
 hold, the box is secretly turned over, so that B is now up- 
 permost. The false slab C falls into A, causing the con- 
 cealed card to be revealed when the box is opened. By using 
 a reverse process, the box is made to serve for the vanish- 
 ing or changing of cards. 
 
 The Mechanical Card Boor, 
 
 |NOTHER excellent contrivance, by the aid of which 
 cards are made to vanish, appear or change, is the 
 Mechanical Card Box, depicted in Fig. 88. The 
 superiority of this box over that just described, lies 
 in the fact that the Mechanical Box, after being shown emp- 
 ty, is held and closed by a gentleman, who, after opening it 
 a minute later, discovers in it the card that the performer 
 
140 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS, 
 
 desired to have appear. The spectator is then invited to 
 inspect the box and fails to find any indication of trickery 
 in it construction. 
 
 FIG. 88. 
 
 A (Fig. 88) represents a slab, pivoted in the bottom cor- 
 ners of the box. At this place, hidden by the wood-work, 
 is inserted a coiled watch spring, which is fastened to one of 
 the pivots of A, tending to force the slab against the back of 
 the box. To set the apparatus for the trick, the card de- 
 sired is placed on the real bottom of the box, and by push- 
 ing a pin through a minute hole from the back of the box, 
 the slab A is pushed inward as indicated in the diagram and 
 folded down on the bottom of the box, where a catch B 
 springs into place, preventing A from flying back to its nor- 
 mal position on the back of the box. 
 
 The box, thus prepared, may be shown empty with im- 
 l^unity, and in this condition is handed to a gentleman 
 with the request for him to lock it and close it himself. In 
 doing so the slot D in the cover engages and slightly moves 
 latch C, which in turn causes catch B to move within the 
 woodwork of the box, thereby releasing A, which by means 
 of the spring at one of its pivots, noiselessly folds up 
 against the back of the box, its upper edge being hidden 
 under a slight projection of the box proper, so that now the 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 141 
 
 apparatus may safely be passed for inspection with no dan- 
 ger of detection. 
 
 THE BRASS CABU BOX. 
 
 SIMPLE but excellent Card Box is that shown in 
 Fig. 89. It is made of sheet brass throughout^ 
 presenting the appearance of a plain box without 
 a top. A card is visibly placed into the open box, 
 
 which is instantly inverted. The card drops out, but is 
 found to have changed into an entirely diiferent one. 
 
 The principle used in the making of this novel box is 
 the same as that of the trick box just described, except that 
 in the present apparatus the top of the box and all springs 
 and catches are dispensed with. There is a false bottom 
 pivoted in the corners, which, by means of a small metal 
 tongue protruding from the rear side of the box, can be 
 noiselessly folded against the back of the box or let down 
 from the latter on the real bottom. The tongue is operated 
 by the fingers of the hand, while holding the box, and cards 
 are made to appear, change or disappear entirely. 
 
 Good use can be made of this box in spiritualistic per- 
 
142 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 formances, where it will do excellent service in exchanging 
 question slips for duplicates previously concealed in the 
 box. The apparent simplicity in the construction of this 
 piece of apparatus recommends it for work of a similar char- 
 acter. 
 
 The Neiv Brass Card Box, 
 
 HONJURERS, who desire something especially neat, 
 ^ novel and clever in the way of a Card Box, will do 
 well to purchase the New Brass Card Box, illus- 
 trated in Fig. 90. This box is made of metal 
 throughout and is just large enough to contain a card. It is 
 
 FIG. 90. 
 
 scarcely an inch in heighth, thus making it appear as if 
 there w^as no chance for trickery in the construction. Yet, 
 when a -card is placed into it and the box closed and given to 
 spectator to hold, he will, upon opening it, find that the 
 card has either vanished or changed into an entirely differ- 
 ent one, according to the arrangements of the performer. 
 
 The secret of the trick lies in the fact that there are 
 really two boxes, B and C, neatly nesting and connected by 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 143 
 
 the same hinges to the lid A, which is of such shape as to 
 fit very snugly into part B. Previous to performing the 
 trick, B, which is nearly of the same depth as C, is placed 
 in the latter and the box may, in this state, be freely shown. 
 After the card has been placed in B, the box is closed, press- 
 ing A into B, in which it becomes firmly lodged. The box 
 is then handed to a spectator, who, upon opening it, takes 
 A and B to be one, thereby disclosing C, which may be either 
 empty or contain a card, into which the card placed in B is 
 supposed to have been transformed. 
 
 The Vanishing Of Thought Cards. 
 
 'N THIS rather neat trick, several cards, that the spec- 
 tators have mentally selected from a number of cards, 
 spread out before them, are caused to mysteriously 
 disappear. 
 
 The secret of the trick lies in the preparation of the 
 cards, which are double-faced, one side of the pack showing 
 twenty-six certain cards, while the other side shows a sim- 
 ilar number of different cards. Spreading out the cards be- 
 fore the eyes of the company, the conjurer requests several 
 persons to note and bear in mind, any of the cards they see. 
 In order to cause the cards to vanish, he simply closes the 
 the pack and turns it over, without being observed, then 
 spreading the cards again. As an entirely different set of 
 cards is thus presented to the spectators, they are unable to 
 locate their respective cards among them. 
 
144 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 X BAYS 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 Pl^jj^ROM a pack of unprepared cards, a number, say 
 ^R§(|^ nine, are selected and placed, by their several hold- 
 ^jM^^ ers, into opaque envelopes, which are then sealed. 
 The closed envelopes are then collected on a plate 
 or tray by a volunteer assistant, who, at the performer's re- 
 quest, hands him any one of the envelopes, w^hich the con- 
 jurer places to his forehead and instantly tells the name of 
 the card contained therein. The envelope is then opened 
 by a spectator, and is found to contain the card the per- 
 former predicted. The contents of the remaining envelopes 
 are next read in the same apparently miraculous manner, 
 the performer, with his usual love of the truth, attributing 
 the experiment to the use of the celebrated Roentgen Rays. 
 
 FIG. 91. 
 
 The envelopes used are perfectly white on the outside 
 and blue on the inside, whereby they are rendered opaque. 
 Eight of them are marked after a plan shown in Pig. 91, the 
 marking consisting of a small dot on the face of the envel- 
 ope. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 145 
 
 The dot on the first envelope is placed in the upper left 
 hand corner, the dot on the second one in the middle of the 
 upper edge, the third in the upper right hand corner, etc., 
 the last (ninth) envelope being devoid ot a mark. 
 
 For each envelope the conjurer has memorized the name 
 of a playing card, as, for instance, the Nine of Clubs for 
 envelope number one, the Ace of Diamonds for envelope 
 number two, etc. These nine cards are picked out of the 
 
 4 ♦ 
 
 
 'a 1 
 
 ♦ '^ ♦ 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 ♦ ♦. 
 
 
 1 ^J 
 
 FIG. 92, 
 
 FIG. 93. 
 
 pack and are then placed on top of the latter. The marked 
 envelopes are placed in a corresponding order, on top of a 
 packet of similar, but unprepared, ones. Thus equipped, 
 the conjurer allows the pack to be shuffled, previously palm- 
 ing the nine cards from the top and replacing them, without 
 being observed, after the pack has been returned. *He then 
 makes the pass and forces the nine cards on different spec- 
 tators, noting, as he goes along, the order of the persons 
 selecting the cards. He next takes the heap of envelopes 
 and distributes the nine uppermost ones in exactly the same 
 rotation as the cards were forced. Each spectator is told to 
 insert his card and seal it, and all of them are collected as 
 described. All the performer does, in order to become ac- 
 quainted with the names of the cards enclosed in the envel- 
 opes, is to note the position of the mark near the edge, for 
 the cue to the card contained therein. 
 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 In this vastly improved form of the preceding experi- 
 
146 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 ment, the conjurer is securely blindfolded and, as a further 
 handicap to his clairvoyant powers, the nine envelopes are 
 covered by a handkerchief, before being given to him. Des- 
 pite these apparently insurmountable difficulties, he predicts, 
 with unfailing accuracy, the name of the card that each en- 
 velope contains. 
 
 The difference in the modus operandi of the trick con- 
 sists in the manner of marking the envelopes, which are 
 pricked with a fine needle instead of being dotted with the 
 ink. This pricking raises a sligh protuberance, which is 
 made more prominent and more lasting by being touched 
 with the tiniest drop of mucilage, which, when dry and 
 hard, causes the mark to be easily detected by the fingers. 
 
 Otherwise, the trick proceeds in exactly the same man- 
 ner as described in the last method, with the addition of the 
 blindfolding of the performer and covering of the envelopes. 
 As the conjurer does not require his sight for this form of 
 the trick, the blindfolding does not affect him; while, so far 
 as the covering of the envelopes is concerned, their marks 
 can be read through the texture of the handkerchief, the 
 tiny projection being easily felt and interpreted. 
 
 ^ 
 
 TUB BALANCBU CABD. 
 
 IN THE course of some trick, in which the performer 
 has occasion to use a silk hat, he demonstrates that he 
 ^Jll is a juggler as well as a magician, by taking a select- 
 ed card and balancing it in an upright position on the 
 crown of the hat, then going among the company continu- 
 ing to balance the card in this position. The card is then 
 removed and together with the hat passed for inspection. 
 
 As usual the secret is a very simple one. To the upper 
 button of the conjurer's vest is tied a blonde human hair 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 14' 
 
 about sixteen inches in length. To the lower end of this 
 hair is attached a very small pellet of adhesive wax. After 
 a card has been chosen, the performer, on his way to the 
 stage, obtains possession of the waxed end of the hair and 
 secretly presses it against the middle of the upper end of the 
 selected card, which he stands upright on the center of the 
 crown of hat, holding it in such a manner and at such a dis- 
 
 FIG. 94. 
 
 tance from his body, that the hair is drawn taut, the card 
 leaning slightly towards the spectators, Pig: 94. As the 
 hair is practically invisible to the naked eye, especially in 
 the evening, the performer can safely venture among the 
 company, allowing them to witness the mysterious feat, at 
 close quarters. Seizing the card, and quickly detaching the 
 wax with his fingers, allowing the hair to drop, he passes 
 both card and hat for inspection. 
 
 For the sake of clearness the hair A in our illustration, 
 is shown much heavier than it is in reality. 
 
148 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 THE LIGHTNING CHANGE, 
 
 pHOWING two cards, the Six of Clubs and the Jack 
 of Hearts, the performer places the first, face 
 downwards upon the table and invites a spectator 
 to place his hand on the card, to prevent it, as he 
 explains from being conjured away. The conjurer then 
 seizes the Jack of Hearts and with a rapid movement of the 
 hand, changes it into the Six of Clubs. The gentleman is 
 asked to turn over the card, upon which his hand rests, and 
 finds it to be the Jack of Hearts. 
 
 FIG. 95. 
 
 FIG. 96. 
 
 The properties necessary for the performance of this 
 novel trick, consist of a double faced card, one side of which 
 is the Six of Clubs, and the other side the Jack of Hearts. 
 Over the court card side of this card, he places an ordinary 
 Six of Clubs, so that he can take both cards and holding 
 them in such a way to appear as one card, show them from 
 both sides. Replacing them on the pack, he takes the un- 
 prepared Six of Clubs and the double card, turning the court 
 card side of the latter to the company. Holding the prepar- 
 ed card between the index and middle finger of the right 
 hand, he transfers the unprepared Six of Clubs to this hand 
 also, seizing it by the thumb and first finger, so that it is in 
 front of the prepared card. The names of the two cards are 
 called out once more and the Jack of Hearts is apparently 
 placed on the table, but instead however, the Six of Spades 
 is thrown down back uppermost, while with the same move- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 149 
 
 ment the double card remaining in the hand is quickly turn- 
 ed around, so that the side representing the Six of Clubs is 
 turned towards the spectators, thereby creating the impres- 
 sion that the card on the table is really the Jack of Hearts. 
 As the trick is now practically done, all that remains for the 
 performer to do, is to command the cards to change, at the 
 same time quickly turning around the prepared card so that 
 the court card side of the latter again faces the company. 
 
 The Card Servants . 
 
 |N MANY tricks with cards, it is necessary that a pack 
 of cards after having been examined and shuffled, is 
 to be exchanged for a pack prearranged or otherwise 
 prepared. To accomplish this neatly, has so far been a 
 rather difficult matter, but since the introduction of the 
 
 FIG. 97. 
 Card Servante, Fig. 97, the task of exchanging packs has 
 b ecome a comparatively easy one. The apparatus is sim- 
 
150 1 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 plicity itself, consisting in the main of a metal rim A, to which 
 is sewn a rather shallow bag of black cloth. To this rim is 
 attached a flat strip of metal, to which is ri vetted a spring 
 clip B. By means of a sharp point protruding from the rear 
 of A, the apparatus can be quickly attached to the back of a 
 suitable chair, by pressing the sharp point into the wood- 
 work of the upper part of the frame. In clip B is inserted 
 the pack of cards, which the conjurer intends to substitute 
 for the examined one in the course of the trick. To do so, he 
 proceeds in the following manner: 
 
 Holding the pack with the right hand, he seizes with 
 the same hand, the upper part of the chair in such a way, that 
 the thumb alone is visible, the rest of the fingers being hid- 
 den by the back of the chair. 
 
 The left hand at the same moment, seizes the seat of the 
 chair, which is set to one side, as if it were in the conjurer's 
 way. During this operation, the pack of cards is dropped 
 from the right hand into the bag of the servante, the right 
 hand, at the same time, removing the duplicate pack from 
 the clip B, the change being unobserved and accomplished 
 with ease. 
 
 Some Card Servantes are made with two spring clips, 
 one at each end of the frame A, so that a second change of 
 packs can be made by the use of the same apparatus. In 
 order to render these changes still more unnoticeable, the 
 Servante is attached to the back of a chair, which has a 
 cane back and behind which there is seemingly no chance of 
 concealing anything. To accomplish this result, the wily 
 conjurer has simply to render the caning opaque, by tacking 
 over the rear a piece of black velvet, behind which he at- 
 taches his Servante in the usual manner. This very ingen- 
 ious way of preparing the back of a chair, can be used to 
 great advaniage in other conjuring tricks. It is impossible 
 to detect the preparation at a slight distance, as a trial on 
 the part of my reader will easily demonstrate. 
 
^ 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 151 
 
 BAPin TRANSIT, 
 
 ij^T^OR the performance of this clever trick, it is neces- 
 ^ sary that the performer should place a duplicate of 
 a certain card, say the Six of Spades, in the pack. 
 After having successfully forced one of these two 
 cards, he invites a spectator to step forward and assist him 
 in the experiment about to follow. The gentleman is first 
 requested to empty the inside pocket of his coat and to place 
 the selected card into the now empty pocket. While the 
 
 ^« 
 
 # 
 
 # 
 
 # 
 
 ♦ 
 
 ♦l 
 
 FIG. yb. 
 
 gentleman is. doing this, the conjurer secretly palms the du- 
 plicate Six of Spades and, addressing the spectator, exclaims : 
 ' 'Upon second thought, I think it will be best if we replace 
 your card in the pack!" at the same time reaching into the 
 spectator's pocket and appearing to remove the selected 
 card, he really takes out the palmed Six of Spades, which, 
 after showing, he replaces in the pack. Commanding it to 
 vanish, he "ruffles" the pack and asks the gentleman to feel 
 in his pocket, to which the card, to all appearances, has re- 
 turned. 
 
 THB CARDS AND THE ORANGE TREE. 
 
 [HE following trick, although requiring but little 
 dexterity and being of a rather simple nature, 
 nevertheless invariably creates a pretty effect, es- 
 pecially if introduced in an assembly where ladies 
 predominate. 
 
152 . NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 On the. conjurer's table is seen a flower pot, containing 
 a plant, to which are attached four oranges, each of which 
 is suspended by a different colored ribbon, or to each of which 
 a small ribbon rosette is pinned. 
 
 The performer next introduces an ordinary pack of 
 cards, requesting each of four ladies to select a card. Each 
 one is requested to tear her card into small pieces, which 
 are collected on a plate by the performer, who requests each 
 lady to retain one of the torn pieces to aid her in remember- 
 ing her card. The remaining pieces are loaded into the 
 Magic Pistol, which is discharged at the orange tree. The 
 oranges are cut off and placed on a plate by the performer, 
 who invites each lady who selected a card, to choose one of 
 the oranges. They are asked to open the fruit, and in it 
 discover their cards, fully restored, with the exception of the 
 retained piece, which is found to fit exactly. 
 
 My reader has no doubt surmised by this time, that the 
 four selected cards were forced and identical with those con- 
 cealed in the oranges previous to the trick. To properly 
 introduce a card into an orange, the button or bloom is care- 
 fully removed and a rolled up card (in this case minus a cor- 
 ner) is inserted. Afterwards, the bloom is easily replaced 
 by the use of melted beeswax. The pieces torn from, 
 or out of , the cards, the performer conceals about his per- 
 son in easily accessible places. It then becomes an easy 
 matter for him to apparently hand to each lady one of the 
 pieces of her card, as if taking it from the plate, but in re- 
 ality giving her a palmed substitute. The conjurer must 
 bear in mind the order in which the cards are forced, as well 
 as the disposition of their respective corners, so as to be 
 able to force the corresponding orange at the finish of the 
 trick. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 158 
 
 CARD, RING AND RIBBON. 
 
 >^^NTRODUCTIVE to the trick proper, the performer bor- 
 rows from some one a plain gold ring, which for safe 
 ^ keeping he places in a piece of apparatus, say the 
 Watch Box or Rattle Box. The box is then laid on an 
 inverted tumbler, so that it will remain in full view of the 
 audience during the entire experiment. Requesting a lady to 
 choose a card from a pack offered to her, the conjurer takes 
 this card and in it with a penknife cuts three holes ABB 
 
 FIG. 99. 
 Fig. 99; and then suspends the card between two chairs by 
 means of two ribbons previously attached to each. The rib- 
 bons are for this purpose, passed through holes B B of the 
 card and then secured with knots. He next introduces a 
 narrow ribbon of about twelve inches in length and after 
 threading it through the round hole A in the center of the 
 card, ties its two ends together, forming loop E as shown in 
 the diagram. 
 
 Retreating to some distance from the suspended card, 
 the artist commands the ring to leave the box and to appear 
 
154 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 in the lower end of loop B, upon which the ring is seen to 
 suddenly appear. The box is then opened and found empty. 
 Tearing the card from the two ribbons by which it is sus- 
 pended, the performer takes it to the person who loaned 
 him the ring, requesting him to identify his property, and 
 to remove it himself from the loop, proving that there is no 
 trickery about card, ring or ribbon. 
 
 In the first place, the apparatus into which the ring is 
 placed, is ingeniously constructed in such a manner that when 
 the performer with his left hand places the ring into the 
 box, the right hand, a moment later, removes it from the 
 other end of the box, which can be secretly opened and 
 closed, without showing a trace of preparation. Having 
 once regained possession of the ring, which the spectators 
 fancy safe enough in the box on the inverted tumbler, the 
 conjurer suspends the card by the ribbon and by means of a 
 small pellet of adhesive wax, secretly attaches the palmed 
 ring to the rear side of the card encircling the hole A as 
 shown by the dotted lines in Fig. 99. In passing the ribbon 
 through the hole A, it is passed through the ring as well. 
 After having formed the loop E, the performer secretly slips 
 over the ring a loop, tied in the end of a fine, black silk 
 thread. This thread, previously arranged, leads to the 
 floor and passes through a staple, directly underneath the 
 suspended card, and from there to the assistant, sta- 
 tioned behind the wings or a screen, as the case may be, and 
 who, at the proper moment, gives a quick pull to this 
 thread. By this operation, the loop in the end of the thread 
 slips between the ring and card and severs the wax, causing 
 the ring to slide by its own weight to the lowest part of the 
 loop. 
 
 If the conjurer has no assistant, he can pull the thread 
 himself, by tying the end to the wand, which should lie on 
 the table. When commanding the ring to appear on the 
 loop, he seizes the wand and, making a sudden gesture 
 with it, accomplishes the very same result, as if an assistant 
 were employed. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 155 
 
 A simpler, but inferior, method of dislodging the ring, 
 is to hit the suspended card a sharp rap with the wand; the 
 ring is thereby loosened and drops to the lower end of the 
 loop. 
 
 The Conjurer' ^8 Prediction, 
 
 [HREE spectators are each requested to think of a 
 card, after which the performer successively 
 seizes each person's hand and asks him to think 
 intently of his card, looking him in the eye, as if 
 fathoming his r^houghts. Stating that he has in this 
 way successfully divined the respective names of the three 
 cards, he proceeds to write their names on three slips of 
 paper, which he rolls up and places in a glass. The three 
 spectators are then asked to remove their cards from the 
 pack, which being counted is naturally found to contain 
 forty nine cards, which with three removed, makes a correct 
 total of fifty two. The persons then place their cards in a 
 small shallow box, held by the performer while the remain- 
 der of the pack is placed on a second, inverted glass. The 
 selected cards now disappear from the box, which is shown 
 to be entirely empty, and reappear in the pack. The slips 
 of paper in the first glass are opened and are found to con- 
 tain the correct names of the mentally chosen cards. 
 
 For the performance of this trick, the conjurer requires 
 an assistant, stationed behind the scenes and who holds in 
 readiness a number of slips of paper on which is written, 
 " of Hearts, of Clubs" etc. Furthermore the per- 
 former needs a card box, a pack of fifty two cards, arranged 
 in a certain known order, and a duplicate pack, consisting of 
 only forty nine cards. This pack is placed on the servante: 
 
lo6 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 and under the performer's vest or in his pochette are con- 
 cealed three indifferent cards. After the three persons have 
 each thought of a card, the conjurer makes a pretense of 
 thought reading as described and then feigns to write the 
 names of the cards on the slips of paper, which he rolls up 
 and places in the glass. The spectators then remove their 
 cards from the complete, prearranged pack, which the per- 
 former immediately exchanges for the pack of forty nine 
 cards on the servante. While the cards in the latter are be- 
 ing counted, the assistant under the pretext of bringing in 
 the Card Box, enters and while placing the box on the table, 
 obtains possession of the cards on the servante and secretly 
 carries them behind the scenes. Rapidly running over the 
 cards, he notes the missing ones and fills in their values as 
 for instance. King, Four, Nine, on the slips of paper lying 
 in readiness. These he rolls up and brings out concealed in 
 the hand, holding the second glass. During the time the 
 pack has been counted and three chosen cards placed in the 
 Card Box. Requesting the gentleman who has counted the 
 pack, to hand it to him, the conjurer secretly adds the three 
 vested cards, and places them on the second glass which is 
 handed to him by the assistant, who manages, unobserved, 
 to give him the rolled up slips of x^aper. The cards are 
 now told to disappear from the box and to return to the 
 pack, which is then counted proving the order to have 
 been obeyed. 
 
 All that now remains for the performer to do, is to ex- 
 change the three palmed slips received from the assistant 
 for the ones in the glass. This he can easily do in the act of 
 handing them to a spectator, or by taking the slips out of 
 the glass with the right hand and pretending to transfer 
 them to the left, really palming them and at the same mo- 
 ment showing the papers concealed in the left hand. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 157 
 
 HANDKERCHIEF AND CARD, 
 
 |PTER having caused a handkerchief to disappear, 
 the conjurer invites some one to select any card 
 at random and give it to him. Then, showing the 
 card from both sides, the performer holds it, by 
 its upper edge, in a vertical position, and appears to slowly 
 extract from it, the previously vanished handkerchief . The 
 card is again given to the spectators, who can examine it 
 closely and fail to see how a handkerchief could possibly be 
 extracted from it. 
 
 FIG. 100. 
 
 For this very illusive eifect, the performer requires a 
 small, flesh colored, pear shaped box (A, Pig. 100), having 
 two flat parallel faces and an opening, B. Into the aper- 
 ture B, located at the small end of the box, a silk handker- 
 chief is pushed previous to the experiment, the box then be- 
 ing concealed under the vest or in the pochette. While the 
 
158 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 selected card is being inspected, the performer obtains pos- 
 session of the box and secretly places it, with the aperture 
 downwards, on the back of the card, holding it in place 
 with one of the lingers. The lingers of the disengaged 
 hand then seize the one corner of the handkerchief, which 
 should protrude a trifle from the opening of the box, and 
 gradually pull it from its hiding place with a mystifying 
 effect. The box is then disposed of under cover of the pro- 
 duced handkerchief, and the card yjassed out for exam- 
 ination. 
 
 Marvelou 8 Coineidenee, 
 
 (HE excellent trick, that I am about to describe, de- 
 pends upon the Mexican Turn Over. (See 
 Sleights and the use of two prepared packs of 
 cards). The cards in pack No. 1 have marked 
 backs, while pack No. 2 consists of ordinary cards whose 
 backs are made up entirely with Tens of Diamonds. Besides 
 
 FIG, 
 
 these, the conjurer has lying on the top of this pack two 
 Tens of Diamonds, both having the same back as the cards 
 in pack No. 1. By the aid of these two cards, the performer 
 is enabled to show the pack No. 2 from the back and then 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 159 
 
 spread it face uppermost to show that the cards are ordinary 
 ones. 
 
 Apparently selecting a card at random from pack No. 
 2, but really taking one of the Tens from the top of the 
 pack, the conjurer places it face downwards, on the table 
 and states that this card is identical with the one that a spec- 
 tator will draw from the pack No. 1, which is then handed 
 to a gentleman, with the request to select a card and place 
 it, also face downwards, on the table. As soon as he does 
 so, the conjurer by glancing at the marked back becomes ac- 
 quainted with the name of the card, which w^e will suppose 
 to be the Queen of Spades. Running his eye over the cards 
 
 FIG. 102. 
 in pack No. 2, he quickly finds tlie Queen of Spades and 
 takes it out, with the Ten spot side turned towards the com- 
 pany. With this card, he turns over the Ten of Spades 
 previously placed on the table, exchanging it however for 
 the prepared card m his hand by means of the Mexican Turn 
 Over, whereby the side representing the Queen of Spades in 
 brought uppermost. With the unprepared Ten of Spades 
 now in the performer's hand, the Queen of Spades placed on 
 tiie table by the spectator is turned over, proving the per- 
 former's statement that both were alike. 
 
 Although cctnsiderable practice ought to be devoted to 
 the acquirement of the feat, the effect on the company will 
 amply repay the conjurer for the time spent in learning the 
 trick. 
 
160 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 Grand Card Maneuvre, 
 
 jFTER removing from a pack of cards, all the court 
 cards, the conjurer places the four Jacks on the 
 top, and the four Kings at the bottom of the pack. 
 The four Queens are covered by a plate, which is 
 inverted over them, from under which they vanish, taking 
 the place on top occupied by the four Jacks. The artist 
 after introducing a second plate, which he also inverts, com- 
 mands another transposition to take place.. Upon lifting the 
 second plate, the Kings and Jacks are discovered under it, 
 while the Queens are found to have returned to their or- 
 iginal place under the first plate. The pack is freely exhib- 
 ited and shown to contain no court cards whatever. 
 
 For the performance of this clever combination trick the 
 following properties are required: 
 
 First. A soup plate of white china, constructed with a 
 false bottom of cardboard, the lower side of which backed 
 with newspaper, while over the other side, white glazed 
 paper in imitation of china ware, has been glued. In exhibit- 
 ing both sides of the plate, the conjurer holds the false bot- 
 tom in position. 
 
 FIG. 103. 
 Second. A prepared, double newspaper containing an 
 invisible trap door, Fig. 103, which by means of a simple 
 mechanism may be turned from the left side over towards 
 the right and vice versa. -.^ 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 161 
 
 Third. Two complete packs of cards. 
 
 Fourth. Four cards which represent Kings on one side 
 and Queens on the other. 
 
 Prior to the trick, the artist conceals the Jacks and 
 Kings of one of the packs, between the false and real bot- 
 tom of the prepared plate, the four Queens of this pack are 
 discarded, and the remaing spot cards are placed in the clip 
 of a Card Servante, attached to the back of a chair. The 
 four Kings of the second pack are hidden under the trap 
 door of the newspaper and the four double car«ds are placed, 
 King side uppermost, among the cards of the second pack. 
 
 Having finished these necessary preparations, the per- 
 former introduces the last named pack and after removing 
 from it, the four King, (double cards) Queen and Jacks, pass- 
 ing the remaining pack, consisting of spot cards only, for 
 inspection. The Queens are placed on the newspaper, as 
 shown in Pig 103 and are covered with an unprepared china 
 X)late, under cover of which the performer releases the trap 
 door, which turning over towards the right, covers the 
 Queens and exposes in their place the previously hidden 
 Kings. 
 
 The Jacks are next placed oli the top of the pack, while 
 the Kings (double cards) are placed at the bottom, being, 
 however, reversed during the operation, so that later on, 
 they seem to have vanished, the Queens having, to all ap- 
 IDearances, taken their place. 
 
 After the conjurer has exhibited the change that has 
 occured, he again places the plate over the Kings on the 
 newspaper and, under cover of it, reverses the trap door so 
 that now the Queens are again visible. Then, taking the 
 prepared plate, he inverts it on a second unprepared news- 
 paper, thereby causing the false bottom to become released 
 and drop down on the paper, thus exposing the hidden 
 Kings and Jacks. After picking up the plate and the last 
 named cards, a moment later, the conjurer passes both for 
 inspection, leaving the false bottom of the plate lying un- 
 noticed on the paper. All that now remains to be done is 
 
162 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 to exchange the pack of cards for those in the clip of the 
 Card Servante, on the back of the chair. 
 
 THE NEW GENERAL CABn, 
 
 ^OR the performance of this clever trick, a pack 
 r^ non-indexed cards is required, the three cards 
 
 consisting 
 
 of 
 
 on 
 
 of the Six, Seven and Eight of 
 
 After having given the cards a False Shuffle, the con- 
 jurer forces the three top cards upon different persons seat- 
 ed at some slight distance from each other, allowing each 
 person to retain his card. Finally another card, say the 
 King of Clubs is chosen (not forced) and returned to the 
 pack, the conjurer slipping the little finger in the place 
 where the card is inserted, ready to make the pass at a mo- 
 ment's notice. Going to the spectator who has drawn the 
 
 r 
 
 ♦ 
 
 ¥ 
 
 
 4 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 ▼ 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 
 FIG. 104- FIG. 105. FIG. 106. 
 
 Six of Diamonds, he requests him to replace the latter any- 
 where in the pack, making ^he pass in opening the latter and 
 allowing the card to be placed below the King of Clubs. In 
 a similar manner, the Eight of Diamonds is made to occupy 
 a position next below^ the Six, while the remaining card, the 
 Seven of Diamonds, is placed directly above the King. Keep- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 16:-} 
 
 ing the- finger on the Seven of Diamonds, the conjurer, at a 
 suitable moment, makes the pass, so that this card now be- 
 comes the uppermost one. Seizing this card and covering 
 the odd middle spot with the thumb of the right hand, he 
 turns to spectator A, who took the Six of Diamonds, and 
 says: "Is this your card, sir:"' The person assents, where- 
 upon the conjurer turns to spectator B, who drew the Eight 
 of Diamonds, and shows him the same card, making it ap- 
 
 FIG. 107. 
 pear as an Eight by covering an imaginary spot with the 
 thumb. Placing the same card, face downwards, on the extend- 
 ed hand of spectator C, who took the Seven of Diamonds, the 
 performer asks him to blow on tiie card, stating that it will 
 change into the one he has chosen. Taking this card, and 
 adroitly changing it for the King of Clubs now on top of 
 the pack, the conjurer requests the fourth spectator to 
 name his card. This done, he places the supposed Seven of 
 Diamonds on the extended hand of spectator D and causes 
 it to be transformed into the King of Clubs, by requesting 
 the gentleman to breathe upon it. 
 
 The Small Curd Fratne. 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 |NE of the best and most mystifying appliances to be 
 used in connection with card tricks, is the small 
 Card Frame or Sand Frame, which, although not 
 of recent origin, is described here for the reason 
 
164 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 that some of my readers may not be acquainted with, the de- 
 tail of its construction. 
 
 The Sand Frame (Pig. 108j consists of a frame proper, • 
 in which the glass is fastened permanently, and a removable 
 back occupying the space behind the glass. The frame, 
 with the back in position, is first shown to be unprepared 
 and, after being covered with a borrowed handkerchief, is 
 given to a lady to hold. A card is then selected, placed in a 
 
 FIG. 108. 
 
 piece of apparatus, as, for instance, the Card Box, and com- 
 manded to vanish from there and appear under the glass of 
 the frame. The handkerchief is removed and the change is 
 seen to have occurred. The back of the frame is then taken 
 out and the card removed. The frame and cards are then 
 inspected and, there being -nothing but the transparent 
 glass and the frame itself, the construction of which shows 
 no trickery, preparation seems impossible. 
 
 The secret is a very ingenious one. The glass in the 
 frame really consists of two sheets, sepg^rated by a small 
 space, for reasons which will become apparent immediately. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 165 
 
 The sides and upper ends of these two glasses are hermeti- 
 cally sealed, while the lower end is left open. This opening 
 corresponds with a secret hollow space in the lower end of 
 the frame, which is filled with fine sand which is of the same 
 color (either white or black) as the removable back of the 
 frame. Prior to the trick, a card is placed between the 
 back and double glass of the frame, which is then turned 
 upside down. The sand thereby leaves the cavity in the 
 lower end of the frame and fills the space between the 
 glasses, causing the frame to appear as if it were entirely 
 empty. While the latter is being covered with a borrowed 
 handkerchief, it is secretly inverted, whereupon the sand 
 runs back into the hollow space, causing the concealed card 
 to become exposed. 
 
 In passing the apparatus for inspection, the conjurer 
 exercises due care in preventing the frame from becoming 
 accidentally turned upside down, thus betraying the secret 
 of the trick. The best plan for the performer to follow in 
 this, is to hold the frame in his own hand and, taking it 
 among the company, show it from all sides. 
 
 My readers will readily perceive how useful this clever 
 contrivance will prove for the appearing and vanishing of 
 selected cards, the beauty of the trick lying in the fact that, 
 to the minds of the f pectators, there is apparently no chance 
 for trickery in the simple construction of the frame, glass 
 and back. 
 
 One objection that I have found with most of the Sand 
 Frames in use, is that they are too large and much too thick, 
 which, besides giving them an ungainly appearance, is also 
 sure to give the audience a clue to the modus operandi. To 
 obviate these drawbacks, I have constructed frames which, 
 besides being of a neat and dainty design (vide illustration) 
 are hardly three- eighths of an inch in thickness, an advan- 
 tage which will no doubt be appreciated by all conjurers 
 who use the trick. 
 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 
 This version of the Small Card Frame Trick, is compar- 
 
166 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 atively little known, and will therefore be of interest to most 
 of my readers. The plan used is entirely different from the 
 one employed in the first method. All parts of the apparat- 
 us, that is frame, glass and back (which is kept in place by 
 means of a pivotted cross piece) being taken apart at the end 
 of the trick and passed for inspection. 
 
 The card is previously concealed between the glass and 
 back same as in the older form, differing therefrom, that in- 
 stead of being hidden by sand, a removable curtain or a 
 piece of cloth is used, the cloth, of course, being of the same 
 color as the back of the frame. The upper end of this small 
 curtain is stiffened slightly by having glued thereto a 
 narrow strip of card board which protrudes a trifle at the 
 back, coming out between the frame and back. In removing 
 the handkerchief, with which the frame has been covered, 
 
 FIG. 109. 
 the conjurer seizes the protruding end of the curtain at the 
 same time and carries it away with the handkerchief, (Fig* 
 109) causing the concealed card to become exposecL^nd as 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 167 
 
 there is now no trickery about the apparatus it may be taken 
 apart and passed for examination : While this is being done, 
 the conjurer has ample time to remove and dispose of the 
 curtain concealed in the borrowed handkerchief. 
 
 My friend Mr. W. E. Robinson, who never touches a 
 trick without improving it in some way, combines the cur- 
 tain and sand idea making it answer for the successive ap- 
 pearance of two cards. The method by which this result is 
 accomplished is so clever and ingenious that my readers can 
 not fail to admire it. The first card is made to appear in 
 Frame, containing the sand, by means of the curtain just de- 
 scribed. The apparatus is then taken apart and everything is 
 shown to be free from preparation. To the outside of the back 
 however is attached by means of adhesive wax, the second 
 card that the conjurer desires to have appear. While 
 causing the appearance of the first card and taking the frame 
 apart, care is taken not to exhibit the card attached to the 
 back, this side being downwards on the table when the ap- 
 paratus is taken apart. In replacing the pieces, the conjurer 
 first lays the frame, face downwards, on the table and then 
 inserts the back, prepared side foremost. In the act of 
 picking up the frame, he turns it over, keeping the back to- 
 wards the company, causing the sand to run between the 
 double glass. He can thus once more show the frame to be 
 apparently empty. Then covering it with the handkerchief, 
 under cover of which, the frame is inverted, the sand runs 
 back into the secret space, thereby disclosing the second 
 card. 
 
 Grande CI air voy a nee Mysterieuse, 
 
 iLTHOUGH the three versions of the trick that I 
 am about to describe, resemble somewhat in 
 effect "The Marvelous Coincidence" the methods 
 employed are entirely different. For this reason 
 I have selected a different title. 
 
168 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 As in "Marvelous Coincidence" a spectator selects a card 
 from a pack and places it on the table, whereupon the per- 
 former lays another card beside it. Upon turning over both 
 cards, they are found to be identical. 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 In this version of the trick, the conjurer hands the 
 spectator a pack of cards with marked, backs, while he him- 
 self has a pack, which is prearranged in a certain order, 
 which he has memorized. The spectator is requested to 
 select a card and place it face downwards on the table. As 
 soon as this is done the performer who is near, reads the 
 card by glancing at its marked back and judging as near as 
 possible the position of the same card in his pack, makes 
 the pass, thereby bringing the desired card at or near the 
 top of the pack. By secretly glancing at the bottom card of 
 the pack — thanks to the formula, he can tell the name of the 
 top card which, if the first judgment has been correct, is the 
 duplicate of the selected card. If not, the error can easily 
 be corrected by another pass, bringing the duplicate to the 
 top. All this is but the work of a moment, the performer 
 seems simply to take from the pack any card that comes in- 
 to his hand, (in reality the top one) and place it on the table. 
 Both cards are then turned over by the spectator and are 
 found to be of the same suit and value. 
 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 
 Instead of the spectator placing the first card on the 
 table, as in the last method, the performer commences the 
 experiment by laying down a card. The spectator then 
 does the same, but with marked cards, which enable the 
 conjurer to tell at a glance the card selected. 
 
 Under the pretext of proving that his pack is unpre- 
 pared, the performer spreads it out, thereby noting the po- 
 sition of the card, the duplicate of which the spectator 
 placed on the table. In closing the pack, he introduces the 
 little finger just above the desired card and brings it to the 
 top of the pack by means of the pass. Using this card, the 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 169 
 
 back of which he turns toward the company, he turns over 
 with it the card he had previously placed on the table, ex- 
 changing it, however, for the one in his hand by means of 
 the Mexican Turnover, with which sleight my readers, by 
 this time, are no doubt on familiar terms. With the card 
 that he has just exchanged for the one previously in his 
 hand, he really, without resorting to trickery, turns over 
 the spectator's card and, as before, both are seen to be 
 identical. 
 
 THIRD METHOD. 
 
 As the two packs of cards used during this experiment, 
 are totally unprepared and, for that reason may be bor- 
 rowed cards, this method is superior to the preceding ones. 
 
 Both packs being devoid of preparation, the conjurer, a 
 
 FIG. 110. 
 true representative of his art, makes the most of the occa- 
 sion by spreading out the cards and showing them freely. 
 But, combining business with pleasure, he at the same time 
 finds the Jack of Spades from both packs, and brings them 
 to the top of one pack by means of the pass. 
 
 He commences the experiment by placing on the table 
 a card, which, needless to say, is the Jack of Spades. A 
 spectator is then invited to select a card, and also to place 
 it, without looking at its face, on the table. The performer 
 takes the toj) card of his pack, that is, the second Jack of 
 Spades, and with it turns over the spectator's card. At the 
 same time, he maks the exchange by means of the Turn 
 Over. Using the card that he has just substituted in his 
 
170 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 hand, he really turns over with it the card he first selected 
 and shows it to be the Jack of Spades, in conformity with 
 his prediction. 
 
 THE BBinOE OF CAUDS. 
 
 |HE trick of this title is a rather singular one, as, in 
 performing it, all laws of gravity are apparently 
 set aside, the cards being spread out in the air, in 
 the form of a bridge, presenting exactly the ap- 
 pearance conveyed by Fig. Ill, which is an exact reproduc- 
 tion of a photograph of the operation. Around the right 
 
 FIG. 111. 
 forearm of the performer is tied a thin, silk cord, under 
 which is passed a black silk elastic cord, which is prevented 
 from slipping through under the silk cord, by a small button 
 or bead, fastened to its end. The elastic cord is then led up 
 the inside of the right sleeve, over the back of the vest and 
 down to one of the rear suspender buttons, to which it is 
 securely attached. Besides this preparation, the performer 
 wears, on the middle finger of his right hand, a loosely fit- 
 ting ring, which is cut open to admit the elastic cord. 
 
 Just before introducing the feat, the conjurer seizes the 
 bead fastened to the elastic cord and, pulling outward, slips 
 the elastic throug the opening of the ring, the bead pre- 
 venting it from flying back into the sleeve- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 171 
 
 Taking the pack of cards in the left hand, palm up- 
 ward, the performer places the latter hand on the inside of 
 the open right. With the backs of the first and second fin- 
 ger of the left hand, the bead, resting against the ring on 
 the right hand, is seized; whereupon the left hand is moved 
 away from the right, taking the elastic along with it. At 
 the same time, the thumb of the left hand springs the cards, 
 allowing them to escape, one at a time, causing them to ar- 
 range themselves along the elastic, as shown in the illus- 
 tration. 
 
 The conjurer can now pass among the company, carry- 
 ing the cards in this fashion and even permitting a specta- 
 tor to select out of the bridge any card that he chooses. 
 Finally, he closes up the pack and passes it for inspection, 
 at the same moment, with the thumb of the right hand dis- 
 engaging the bead from the ring. The elastic instantly re- 
 cedes within the sleeve and the performer is at liberty to 
 allow an examination of both hands, as well as the cards. 
 In order that the opening in the ring may not be noticed, 
 he secretly turns it, so that it is concealed between the sec- 
 ond and third fingers. 
 
 % 
 
 THE CARDS AND MIRROR. 
 
 »Jifl 
 
 iN THIS trick, three cards are selected and are shuffled 
 ^^ into the pack, which the performer throws against a 
 mirror, All the cards fall to the floor, with the ex- 
 ception of the three selected one, which remain attach- 
 ed to the glass. 
 
 Previous to the performance, the conjurer takes dupli- 
 cates of the cards that he intends to force and after placing 
 one of them, say the Queen of Diamonds on top of the other 
 card, which we will suppose to be the Five of Spades, 
 
172 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 passes a fine thread through the lower left hand corner of 
 both cards. Above and below the cards a knot is made in 
 the thread, which thus practically forms a rivet. The Five 
 of Spades is now pushed over towards the right and the re- 
 maining card, the Three of Clubs, is placed on the Queen of 
 Diamonds and is secured by means of a second thread rivet 
 to the lower right corner. To each of the upper corners of the 
 
 FIG. 112. 
 
 FIG. 113. 
 
 FIG. 114. 
 
 Queen of Diamonds, a fine thread or hair is then attached 
 and connected with the Five of Spades and Three of Clubs 
 so arranged as to hold the two end cards in a slanting posi- 
 tion, suspended from the middle card the Queen of Diamonds. 
 To the back of the Queen, a pellet of adhesive wax is then 
 attached, whereupon the three cards thus prepared are 
 vested. 
 
 Three similar cards are now forced and are shuffled in- 
 to the pack by the spectators. While they are occupied 
 with this, the conjurer secretly obtains possession of the 
 prepared cards, palming them and upon receiving the pack, 
 unobservedly adds to it the three duplicates. He then 
 throws the pack, waxed side of the preparer card foremost, 
 squarely against the mirror, to which the Queen of Diamonds 
 thereby becomes attached and the two cards fastened to its 
 lower corners immediately arranging themselves upon either 
 side of it, falling askant, being held by the hair attached to 
 their upper corners. 
 
 CS2 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 173 
 
 THE SPIRIT ENVELOPE. 
 
 jLTHOUGH I have already given an explanination 
 of this trick, in one of my other works, neverthe- 
 less I repeat the description, as some of my pres- 
 ent readers may be unacquainted with the trick, 
 the effect of which is as follows: 
 
 From a wire or ribbon, stretched across the room or stage, 
 an envelope is seen suspended, which, if the conjurer de- 
 sires, can be taken down and shown to be empty, before pro- 
 ceding with the trick. An ordinary pack of cards is then 
 examined by the spectators, who choose from it any cards 
 they desire, the performer calling particular attention to 
 the fact that he does not influence their choice in any man- 
 ner. 
 
 The performer cannot possibly be aware of the names 
 of the cards that have been selected, and the persons taking 
 the cards are requested to retain them. The conjurer then 
 takes down the suspended envelope and, opening it, extracts 
 a slip of paper bearing the correct name of every card se- 
 lected. 
 
 The only peculiarity of the suspended envelope, the 
 back of which is turned towards the company, is that its 
 front is covered with black satin of good quality, which is 
 neatly glued thereon. In taking down the envelope for the 
 purpose of showing it empty, the conjurer is careful not to 
 expose the black, rear side. The pack used in the experi- 
 ment, although an ordinary one, has been prearranged, ac- 
 cording to some formula with which the performer is famil- 
 iar. Therefore, when a card is drawn, he secretly glances 
 at the next one and, knowing the arrangement, becomes ac- 
 quainted with the selected card. By the wording of his re- 
 quests to the different spectafors, he conveys to his assis- 
 tant, behind the scenes, by a system of cues, the names of 
 the chosen cards. The assistant writes them on a slii) of 
 paper, that he has in readiness and quickly encloses it in a 
 second envelope, prepared in exactly the same manner as 
 
174 
 
 NEW ERA CAKD TRICKS. 
 
 the one suspended on the stage. This envelope (E, Pig. 115) 
 he places, black side uppermost, on a shallow metal tray, 
 over the flat part of which has been glued black satin, the 
 remaining part of the tray being japanned black. 
 
 FIG. 115. 
 
 While the conjurer is entertaining the company, the as- 
 sistant quietly brings in the tray and places it on a chair or 
 table. The performer then, picking up the tray, takes the 
 suspended envelope and lays it, black side downwards, di- 
 rectly on the invisible envelope, E, and picks up both envel- 
 opes together, so as to cause them to appear as one. In re- 
 placing them on the tray, he carelessly turns them over, 
 whereby the second envelope, containing the slip, becomes 
 the upper one. This envelope the conjurer opens and from 
 it extracts the written slip as described. The original sus- 
 pended envelope, the black side of which is now uppermost, 
 remains unobserved on the tray, which a moment later is 
 carried off the stage by the assistant. 
 
 The Divination Of Thought. 
 
 TRICK resembling in principle the preceding, 
 although dependant upon a different principle, is 
 the following: Introductory to the trick the per- 
 former announces that he will write on a slip of 
 paper the names of three cards that will be selected during 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 175 
 
 the experiment, as well as their numerical location in the 
 pack. This slip he encloses in an envelope and gives it in 
 charge of a spectator, and later on it is opened to prove the 
 statement. 
 
 For this the following preparation is necessary. In the 
 first place the conjurer requires two similar envelopes, one 
 of which is unprepared the other having an extra front 
 containing a tightly folded slip of paper, so that, when held 
 to the light, it apparently contains a slip of paper, although 
 the flap may be opened and the envelope shown perfectly 
 empty. It is concealed on the servante of the table, while 
 the unprepared envelope, together with a pencil and a blank 
 slip of paper, are placed on the table. 
 
 The assistant, behind the scenes, has a small, very thin 
 metal case, which is enamelled white and which is just large 
 enough to easily admit a folded slip of paper. On each of 
 the flat sides of this case a small quantity of adhesive wax 
 is spread, with which later on to attach it to the prepared 
 envelope. Furthermore, the assistant has in his possession 
 a slip of paper, on which the following sentences are writ- 
 ten, with the space for the numbers of the cards left blank: 
 
 "The first gentleman will select the card, which is 
 
 the Two of Diamonds. '" 
 
 FIG. 116. 
 
 FIG. 117 
 
 FIG. 118. 
 
 card, 
 
 "The second gentleman will decide upon the - 
 which will be the Four of Clubs. '" 
 
 ' 'The lady, however, will choose the card, the King 
 
 of Spades.*' 
 
176 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The pack of cards used during the experiment is pre- 
 pared by taking a dozen or more of the cards, the top three 
 being the Two of Diamonds, the Four of Clubs a^d the King 
 of Spades and laying them face downwards on the face side 
 of the remainder of the pack. 
 
 In introducing the experiment, the performer explains 
 that, by the aid of a wonderful faculty of divination with 
 which he is gifted, he will predict what will take place later, 
 and then goes through the pretense of writing something on 
 the slip of paper lying on the table. This he encloses in 
 the unprepared envelope, immediately exchanging it for the 
 prepared envelope, which is lying on the servante, and gives 
 it to a lady to hold. 
 
 He then invites a gentleman to tell him the number of 
 a card, counting from the top of the pack, that he will 
 choose; and, for this purpose, holds the pack with the three 
 cards to be forced, at the bottom. The gentleman, being re- 
 quested not to name too high a number, says, we will sup- 
 pose, "The twelfth card. " Whereupon, the performer pro- 
 ceeds to count off eleven cards from the the top, adroitly 
 turning the pack over at this moment and exhibiting the 
 card which is now on top (the Two of Diamonds), and places 
 this, counting "Twelve,'' on the table. At the same time, 
 the assistant behind the scenes, writes "Twelfth" in the 
 blank space left for that purpose. 
 
 Turning the pack into its original position, the conjurer, 
 in a similar manner, forces the Four of Clubs and King of 
 Spades, by requesting another gentleman and also a lady to 
 call out a number and, counting, turns over the pack just 
 before arriving at the number called, as before. The assis- 
 tant, who hears the numbers chosen, fills in the blank spa- 
 ces and, folding the slip of paper, quickly inserts it in the 
 fiat metal case, which he secretly places on the servante of 
 the table, while bringing in some properties for another 
 trick. The performer obtains possesion of the metal box 
 and palming it, secretly attaches it, by means of the wax, to 
 the back of the envelope, which has now been returned to 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 177 
 
 him. He then opens the end of this envelope and, pre- 
 tending to shake out the slip contained therein, really al- 
 lows the slip to slide from the box, while the one in the 
 double front of the envelope remains in its place, so that 
 the envelope may be shown perfectly empty. Handing the 
 slip to a gentleman, he asks him to read it aloud, and re- 
 quests the three spectators, who selected cards, to state 
 whether or not his prediction in regard to the number and 
 name of the card has been correct. 
 
 Mne monies Applied to Cards, 
 
 CAPITAL introduction to a series of card tricks, 
 consists of the instantaneous memorization, by the 
 performer, of the order of a pack of thirty two 
 cards, which has previously been shuffled by a 
 spectator. 
 
 This bona tide feat of memory can be exhibited in a 
 variety of ways at the option of the performer, who takes 
 the shuffled pack and simply glancing at every card, then 
 turns away and proceeds to call off the names of the cards in 
 the exact order in which they are lying. To make matters 
 appear still difficult, he can even name them in the reverse 
 order. For instance upon a spectator asking him, ' 'Which 
 position in the pack does the Jack of Club occupy V" or 
 "What is the name of the twelfth card from the top of the 
 pack?" he immediately gives the correct answer. The 
 effect of a performance of this kind, upon an intelligent audi- 
 ence is excellent and never fails to bring forth rounds of 
 sincere applause. 
 
 As an article teaching the very interesting art of Mne- 
 monics would be out of place in a book of card tricks: I shall 
 confine myself to a brief description of the principles in- 
 
178 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 volved, referring those of my readers who wish to go to the 
 trouble of mastering the art, to some standard work on the 
 subject. 
 
 Mnemonics is a system, in which certain key words, 
 perfectly memorized by the performer, are linked to other 
 words or ideas that are to be memorized, so that in order to 
 recollect the given word, the performer simply has to think 
 of the key word that he has previously connected with it in 
 the form of a short sentence. 
 
 It is first necessary to learn the following table: 
 
 l=t or d. 6 ch, sh, i 3 (soft) 
 
 2=n. 7 k, g, g, ng, c (hard) 
 
 3=m. 8 f , V. 
 
 4==r. 9 p, b. 
 
 5=1. 10 s, c, j (soft) 
 
 By the aid of this easily mastered rule, a table of key 
 words is constructed. The vow^els and silent consonants in 
 key word signify nothing, vocalized consonants only being 
 used. Thus "Tea'' the first word contains consonant T, 
 which according to the rule, denotes 1. The consonant N, 
 in the word hen represents No. 2 etc. 
 
 Each person is strongly advised to construct a table of 
 key words of his own, which he will be able to memorize 
 much easier than a given table, nevertheless I have offered 
 a table for the use of persons who do not wish to go to this 
 trouble. 
 
 
 
 TABLE. 
 
 
 1 tea, 
 
 9 bee. 
 
 17 deck, 
 
 25 nail, 
 
 2 hen. 
 
 10 dice, 
 
 18 dove. 
 
 26 niche. 
 
 3 may. 
 
 11 toad, 
 
 19 tube. 
 
 27 neck, 
 
 4 rye. 
 
 12 tin, 
 
 20 noose, 
 
 28 navy. 
 
 5 owl. 
 
 13 dime. 
 
 21 hand, 
 
 29 nib. 
 
 6 show. 
 
 14 door. 
 
 22 nun. 
 
 30 mace. 
 
 7 key. 
 
 15 tile. 
 
 23 name, 
 
 31 mat. 
 
 8 fay. 
 
 16 dish, 
 
 24 owner, 
 
 32 moon, etc. 
 
 By studying the table a few moments, it will be per- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 179 
 
 ceived that numbers suggest corresponding names, and the 
 
 names corresponding numbers. 
 
 
 
 Now for the thirty two 
 
 cards, the following - 
 
 words are 
 
 to be perfectly 
 
 memorized. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Spades. 
 
 Hearts. 
 
 Clubs. 
 
 Diamonds. 
 
 1. Ace, 
 
 Tar, 
 
 Tomato, 
 
 Dark, 
 
 Duck, 
 
 2. King, 
 
 Negro, 
 
 Napkin, 
 
 Nun, 
 
 Nude, 
 
 3. Queen, 
 
 Mole, 
 
 Meat, 
 
 Mud, 
 
 Moon, 
 
 4. Jack, 
 
 Rat, 
 
 Rose, 
 
 Rubber, 
 
 Ruby, 
 
 5. Ten, 
 
 Licorice, 
 
 Lemon, 
 
 Lock, 
 
 Lobster, 
 
 6. Nine, 
 
 Shoe, 
 
 Cheese, 
 
 Steamer, 
 
 Cherry, 
 
 7. Eight, 
 
 Coat, 
 
 Goose, 
 
 Cap, 
 
 Cob, 
 
 8. Seven, 
 
 Fly, 
 
 Fire, 
 
 Funeral, 
 
 Fox. 
 
 It will be noticed, that all black cards, that is, the 
 Spades and Clubs, are represented by black or dark articles, 
 while the red cards, the Hearts and Diamonds are indicated 
 by red or light objects. The words in connection with the 
 numbers and names will have to be thoroughly mastered, so 
 that to the performer any word will instantly and correctly 
 suggest its card and vice versa. 
 
 As an example we will suppose that the first five cards 
 to be committed to memory are: The King of Hearts, (Nap- 
 kin) the Eight of Spades, (Coal) the Queen of Diamonds, 
 (Moon) the Jack of Clubs, (Rubber) the Ace of Spades (Tar. ) 
 .These the performer links to his first five key words in 
 about the following manner: I spilt some Tea (1) on my 
 Napkin (K. H.) The hen was discovered among the Coal 
 (8 S). In May (3j the Moon (Q. D. ) rises late. I have some 
 Rye (4) in a Rubber (J. C.) bag. The Owl (5) was caught by 
 means of Tar (A. S. ) In this fashion the remaining cards 
 are to be memorized, the odd connection formed between the 
 key words and the card words become for the time firmly im- 
 I)ressed upon the mind, so that the performer with the nec- 
 essary practice can readily execute the feats described. 
 
 An effect which appears to be more difficult than the one 
 previously mentioned, although requiring no extra trouble 
 to perform, is the following: 
 
180 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 After the performer has looked over the cards, he ar- 
 ranges them upon the table, backs uppermost, in four rows 
 of eight cards each. A spectator is then requested to alter 
 the positions of these cards as dictated by the performer, 
 who then turns away from the cards and tells the gentleman 
 to take, for instance, the fourth card in the first row and 
 to place it the last in the second row. The card that oc- 
 cupies this place is to be taken up and given the second 
 place in the fourth row, etc., the artist continuing to dictate 
 in this manner until the order of the cards has been en- 
 tirely changed. The cards are now turned fjice up and it is 
 seen that each row contains all the cards of one suit arrang- 
 ed in the regular order from Seven to Ace. 
 
 THE ACROBATIC CARDS. 
 
 |PTER having borrowed a silk hat, the conjurer 
 places it crown downwards upon the table. Pour 
 cards are then chosen by different persons and 
 shuffled into the pack by a spectator, who returns 
 the pack to the performer. The latter places the cards in- 
 the borrowed hat and, after having asked for the names of 
 the selected ones, commands them to separate from the rest 
 of the pack, which command is instantly obeyed by the four 
 cards, which jump out of the hat, flying high into the air. 
 They are then picked up and identified by their owners. 
 
 ^ For this trick an apparatus is required, consisting of a 
 flat metal box, which is just large enough to admit of four 
 cards, duplicates of the ones to be forced during the experi- 
 ment. To the middle of the upper edges of the box, is fas- 
 tened an elastic, indicated, in position for service, by the 
 white dotted line, E, in the drawing. This elastic passes in 
 a downward direction, from one edge underneath therdcards. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 181 
 
 and upwards to the other edge of the box, to which it is se- 
 cured. It is of such a length as to be stretched to its fullest 
 extent when the cards are forced into the box. A hinged 
 lever is attached to the side of the box, its upper bent end 
 normally preventing the elastic from forcing out the cards. 
 The box, which has been concealed on the person of the 
 performer, is secretly introduced by him into the borrowed 
 hat on his way to the stage, it being attached to the inside 
 
 FIG. 119. 
 
 leather band by means of two sharp hooks, soldered to the 
 rear side of the box. This having been done, duplicates of 
 the four cards in the box are forced and shuffled into the 
 pack, which the conjurer then places in the hat. In order to 
 cause the cards to jump out, he simply presses the lever, 
 whereupon, the cards being released, are shot into the air by 
 the elastic with considerable force. In the act of removing* 
 the remaining cards from the hat, the performer detaches 
 the box, concealing it under the cards and dropping it on 
 the servante of the table at the earliest opportunity- 
 
182 NEW. ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 SINGULAB TRANSPOSITION. 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 SPECTATOR is requested to select two cards at 
 random, to insert them in the middle of the pack, 
 and finally to place it on the table. This being 
 done, the performer states his intentions of pass- 
 ing the two selected cards from the center to the bottom of 
 the pack, by simply giving it a severe blow with the hand. 
 No sooner said than done, for upon turning over the pack, 
 the two cards are discovered on the bottom as promised. 
 
 The secret of this very deceptive feat is simplicity its- 
 self, a slight previous preparation being necessary. The 
 conjurer has picked out the Seven of Clubs and Eight of 
 
 ['♦ ♦ 
 
 
 '« « 
 
 ♦*♦ 
 
 
 
 ♦ *! 
 
 
 ♦ #1 
 
 74. 
 
 
 75. 
 
 
 
 
 ♦ ♦; 
 
 
 FIG. 76. FIG. 77. 
 
 Spades, and placed them on the bottom of the pack, while 
 he takes the Eight of Clubs and Seven of Spades, and placed 
 them in the center, forcing them from there on a sp<ectator. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 183 
 
 whom he allows to get but a brief look at the cards. The 
 
 Eight of Clubs and Seven of Spades are then returned to 
 
 the pack, which is given a severe blow as described. The 
 
 two bottom cards, the Seven of Clubs and Eight of Spades 
 
 are then exhibited as the chosen ones. Transparent as this 
 
 ruse may seem, it is rarely detected and then only through 
 
 the neglect of the performer in his misdirection. Prohatum 
 
 est. 
 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 
 This is an elaboration of the trick just described. The 
 pack is prepared by previously placing on the top the Six 
 of Diamonds and the Seven of Hearts, while the Six of 
 Hearts and Seven of Diamonds are contained in the middle 
 of the pack, with the finger above them ready to make the 
 double handed pass. Thus prepared the performer advances 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 FIG. 
 
 78. 
 
 7^ 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 FIG. 79. 
 
 
 FIG. 80. 
 
 FIG. 81. 
 
 to a spectator and requesting him to draw two cards, makes 
 the pass and forces the Seven of Diamonds and Six of Hearts 
 from the center of the pack. The spectator is told not to look 
 
1H4 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 at the face of these two cards, but to place them on his lap 
 or on the table. The pack is then handed to him and he is 
 invited to select any other card at random from the middle 
 of the pack, and to mark it on the face side. While this is 
 being done, the conjurer takes the pack and making the 
 pass, thereby bringing the two cards on top, which as will 
 be remembered are the Six of Diamonds and Seven of 
 Hearts, to the center, still keeping the two heaps divided by 
 the little finger. The spectator is then asked to return the 
 marked card to the pack, which the performer opens at the 
 very place, when the Six of Diamonds and Seven of Hearts 
 are situated. He next requests the spectator to take the 
 two first cards that he drew and to replace them anywhere 
 in the pack. As the spectator is picking up the designated 
 cards, (the Six of Hearts and Seven of Diamonds) the con- 
 jurer quickly makes the pass and brings all three cards i. e. 
 the marked ones, the Seven of Hearts and the Six of Dia- 
 monds to the top of the pack. The spectator does as he is 
 bidden by inserting the two remaining cards in the pack at 
 any place he chooses. The performer then states that he 
 will cause the three chosen cards to assemble at the top of 
 the ]3ack, at the same moment slightly ruffling the latter. 
 Three cards are then deliberately removed from the top and 
 to all appearances, seem the chosen ones. 
 
 As I have already stated in the description of the first 
 version of the trick, the difference between the Six of Hearts 
 and Seven of Diamonds and the Seven of Hearts and the Six 
 of Diamonds, is not at all apt to be noticed, especially if the 
 performer keeps the attention of the spectator engaged by 
 the judicious use of patter. 
 
X 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 185 
 
 VICE VERSA. 
 
 Pji^|fi|OR this excellent trick, it is necessary to have two 
 [^p^^ similar cards, which are placed on top of the pack. 
 ^^^^^ Asking some one to come forward and to shuffle the 
 cards, the conjurer palms the two cards from the 
 top and replaces them when the pack is returned to him. 
 Making the pass, he forces one of the duplicate cards, which 
 we will suppose to be Aces of Diamonds, and while the spec- 
 
 FIG. 120. 
 tator is looking at his card and showing it to the audience, 
 at the conjurer's request, the latter quickly makes the pass, 
 thereby bringing the second Ace back to the top and palms 
 it. He then gives the pack to the temporary assistant and 
 asks him to shuffle his card into the pack. Showing him 
 the card that is now at the bottom of the pack, he gives it 
 to the gentleman and requests him to show it to the com- 
 pany. 
 
 FIG. 121. 
 We will suppose this card to be the Jack of Clubs. 
 The gentleman is invited to chose one of two envelopes ly- 
 
im NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 ing on the table and to open it, the conjurer accompanying 
 his request with a gesture of the right hand, which at the 
 same time enables him to exchange the Jack of Clubs in 
 his right hand, for the Ace of Diamonds on the top of the 
 top of the pack. This latter card, which everyone supposes 
 to be the Jack of Clubs, is inserted face downwards in the 
 chosen envelope, which is selected by the spectator himself, 
 who is afterwards told to write the name the card, "Jack 
 of Clubs, '* on the outside of the envelope, which is then 
 given to some one to hold. 
 
 As will be remembered, the Jack of Clubs is still on 
 the top of the pack. Running the cards before the eyes of 
 the spectator, the performer invites him to point out the 
 first card chosen, that is, the Ace of Diamonds; himself, of 
 course, professing ignorance as to its value. After this 
 card has been found and removed, the performer exhibits it 
 and deftly exchanges it for the Jack of Clubs on top of the 
 pack, which is now enclosed in the remaining envelope, 
 which is marked as containing the Ace of Diamonds and 
 given to another spectator to hold. The performer now des- 
 cribes what has apparently taken place and then commands 
 the two cards to change places. The envelopes are opened 
 by the person holding them and the performer's command is 
 found to have been obeyed. 
 
 A HYPNOTIC EXPERIMENT, 
 
 jN THE patter preceding the pretty trick, that I am 
 about to explain, the conjurer states that in accord- 
 gJH ance with the popular fad of hypnotism, he will next in- 
 troduce an interesting experiment based upon the laws 
 of that science. He explains that not only animated objects 
 can be subjected to the mesmeric influences, but inanimate 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 18'; 
 
 objects as well. For his subject, he states, he will select 
 some of the cards with which he has been performing, first 
 exhibiting them to prove that they are in no wise prepared. 
 He then proceeds, by means of repeated passes, to charge 
 them with the mesmeric fluid, and taking two of them, gent- 
 ly rubs them against each other, causing one card to adhere 
 to the other, which is held in the hand. Seizing another 
 card and rubbing it against the second suspended card, he 
 
 FIG. 122. 
 
 causes it to adhere to this in a similar manner (Fig. 122), and 
 so continuing until he has quite a chain of them, clinging 
 together in a mysterious way. They are then removed one 
 at a time and once more shown to be unprepared. : 
 
 My reader, knowing the slight regard the conjurer has - 
 for the truth when he "tells his patter," has of course sur- 
 mised long ago, that hypnotism has absolutely nothing to do 
 with the experiment. The apparently wonderful result is 
 obtained by very simple means, the performer using special- 
 ly prepared cards for the trick. In each corner of the 
 
188 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 black line, which surrounds the court cards, a tiny hole is 
 made with a very fine needle. Through this hole a human 
 hair is drawn and its end fastened on the back of the card 
 by means of a small piece of another split card, which is 
 neatly glued on. The other end of the hair is then passed 
 through the second similar hole in the same end of the card 
 and is secured in the same manner by an invisible patch on 
 the back of the card. Each card, of all the court cards 
 that are to be used, is prepared in this manner. By an in- 
 spection of Fig. 123, in which the hair is represented by a 
 fine white line in the black border line of the picture of the 
 card, the arrangement will be easily comprehended. 
 
 FIG. 123. 
 
 The remaining cards, which may either be spot cards or 
 court cards also, are first split in the upper right and lower 
 left corners, after which a very small hook (A, Fig. 124) is 
 inserted at these corners, which are then glued shut. The 
 cards if properly prepared, can be safely shown around with- 
 out anybody noticing the slight preparation. Holding a 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 189 
 
 court card in the right hand, the conjurer with his left hand 
 seizes a spot card and rubs its upper right corner against 
 the lower end of the court card and after a few pretended 
 futile attemps, slips the hook A under the tightly stretched 
 hair of the court card, causing them to apparently adhere in 
 the manner described. Seizing another court card and rub- 
 bing its face against the back of the spot card, he suspends 
 it to the latter, continuing this process until he has a chain 
 
 FIG. 124. 
 of eight or ten cards, which are then removed one by one 
 and are again shown to be to all appearance unprepared. 
 
 A pretty effect can be created at the end of the experi- 
 ment, by taking the disengaged left hand and placing it 
 under the lowest of the suspended cards and then making 
 an upward motion with this hand, causing all the cards to 
 separate and fall to the floor. 
 
 K2 
 
190 ^1^ NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 THE MYSTERIOUS HAT. 
 
 jPTER having borrowed a hat and placed it on the 
 table, the performer requests a spectator to select 
 two cards at random from the pack. This having 
 been done, he receives the cards face downwards 
 and immediately changes them for the two topmost cards of 
 the pack by means of the Bottom Change. These cards are 
 laid on the extended hand of another spectator, who is told 
 to place his other hand over the cards, so as to hold them se- 
 curely- Addressing the first person, the performer remarks 
 that he has selected two cards, which are held by the second 
 spectator and the name of these cards are at present known 
 to no one but himself. This remark gives the conjurer suf- 
 ficent time to note the two cards on the bottom, which as 
 will be remembered are the ones really chosen. These are 
 brought to the top of the pack by means of the pass. He 
 next calls attention to the empty hat lying on the table, by 
 pointing at it, executing the gesture with the right hand, 
 which in passing over the pack held in the left hand, quickly 
 palms the two cards on top. The hat is next seized with the 
 hand in which the cards are palmed, the thumb being on the 
 outside and the fingers on the inside of the hat, into which 
 the palmed cards are dropped and which is then placed 
 crown downwards, at some little distance from its former 
 position. 
 
 The pack is now offered to the second gentleman who is 
 still holding the two cards, that the spectators believe to be 
 the selected ones, with the request, to replace them in the 
 pack and to shuffte it. After the cards have been returned 
 to the conjurer, he places them against his forehead and 
 proceeds slowly to name the chosen cards, an easy task for 
 him, since he has previously seen them, when at the bottom 
 of the pack. The two cards chosen at the beginning of the 
 trick are then ordered to leave the pack and pass into the 
 hat, where they are subsequently discovered to the astonish- 
 ment of every one, nobody being able to imagine how they 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 191 
 
 came there, as the conjurer has not been near the hat, after 
 the chosen cards were returned to the pack. 
 
 MYSTIC JDIVINATION. 
 
 ]HE conjurer introduces an ordinary pack of cards, 
 and, after shuf&ing- it thoroughly, invites a spec- 
 tator to cut it as often as he pleases. Then, turn- 
 ing his back to the gentleman, he requests him to 
 divide the pack into as many heaps as he desires, the heaps 
 to be laid in successive order on the table. One of them is 
 then to be chosen and covered with a handkerchief by the 
 gentleman. This packet of cards, enveloped in the bor- 
 lowed handkerchief, is placed in the spectator's pocket by 
 the performer, who then proceeds to call out or write on a 
 blackboard, the names of a number of cards. The gentle- 
 man is requested to remove the cards from his pocket and 
 finds that their names are in conformity with the predic- 
 tions of the performer. 
 
 The secret of this novel trick is, as usual, a very simple 
 one. The pack used, is prearranged after the formula of 
 "Eight Kings threatened to Save, etc.," and is given a False 
 Shufle by the conjurer, who then allows the pack to be cut 
 as often as desired, knowing that simple cutting will not dis- 
 turb the order of the cards, which are next divided into a 
 number of heaps, one of which is covered by a borrowed 
 handkerchief, preferably of white silk. 
 
 In the act of placing the packet in the gentleman's 
 pocket, the conjurer slightly stretches that part of the hand- 
 kerchief which surrounds the cards, and is thus enabled to 
 read the top card through the fabric. Upon becoming ac- 
 quainted with the name of this card, he can easily tell, by 
 means of his formula, the names of the cards following it. 
 
192 NEW ERA CAKD TRICKS. 
 
 In order to be able to tell the number of cards contained 
 in the handkerchief, he simply looks at the top card of the 
 heap which occupied the place next to the chosen one. This 
 card serves as a cue to the name of the card at the bottom 
 of those in the handkerchief. 
 
 % 
 
 mBDESTINATION. 
 
 SEALED envelope, containing a slip of paper, is 
 exhibited and given in charge of a spectator, whom 
 we will call A. The conjurer then introduces two 
 piquet packs of thirty- two cards each, giving one 
 pack to a spectator B, and the other one to a third gentle- 
 man C. B is then requested to think of any one of the 
 cards as well as its number, counted from the face side 
 of the pack. This number, say fifteen, is then called 
 out, and A is told to open the envelope in his posses- 
 sion. In it he finds a slip bearing the number twenty-five. 
 C is then requested to count off from the back of his pack, 
 beginning with the number of C's card, in this case fifteen, 
 and ending with the number twenty- five, on the slip. C 
 would therefore proceed to count, in taking off the cards, as 
 follows; "Sixteen, seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, twenty, 
 twenty-one, twenty-two, twenty-three, twenty-four, twenty- 
 five." The twenty- fifth card in his pack will be the one se- 
 lected by B. 
 
 In order to perform this interesting experiment, the 
 conjurer, previous to the performance, must arrange the 
 two packs in the following order: 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 193 
 
 For Person B. For Person C. 
 
 FACES UP. 
 
 1. 
 
 QD. 
 
 17. 
 
 KH. 
 
 2. 
 
 AS. 
 
 18. 
 
 AC. 
 
 3. 
 
 lOD. 
 
 19. 
 
 9H. 
 
 4. 
 
 7C. 
 
 20. 
 
 8C. 
 
 5. 
 
 9C. 
 
 21. 
 
 QC. 
 
 6. 
 
 KS. 
 
 22. 
 
 7D. 
 
 7. 
 
 IOC. 
 
 23. 
 
 AH. 
 
 8. 
 
 lOH. 
 
 24. 
 
 QS. 
 
 9. 
 
 JH. 
 
 25. 
 
 JS. 
 
 10. 
 
 7S. 
 
 26. 
 
 8H. 
 
 11. 
 
 lOS. 
 
 27. 
 
 KD. 
 
 12. 
 
 7H. 
 
 28. 
 
 QH. 
 
 13. 
 
 KC. 
 
 29. 
 
 9S. 
 
 14. 
 
 JD. 
 
 30. 
 
 JC. 
 
 15. 
 
 8S. 
 
 31. 
 
 8D. 
 
 16. 
 
 9D. 
 
 32. 
 
 AD. 
 
 
 FACES UP. 
 
 
 iT 
 
 JS. 
 
 17. 
 
 JH. 
 
 2. 
 
 8H. 
 
 18. 
 
 7S. 
 
 3. 
 
 KD. 
 
 19. 
 
 lOS. 
 
 4. 
 
 QH. 
 
 20. 
 
 7H. 
 
 5. 
 
 9S. 
 
 21. 
 
 KC. 
 
 6. 
 
 JC. 
 
 22. 
 
 JD. 
 
 7. 
 
 8D. 
 
 23. 
 
 8S. 
 
 8. 
 
 AD. 
 
 24. 
 
 9D. 
 
 9. 
 
 QD. 
 
 25. 
 
 KH. 
 
 10. 
 
 AS. 
 
 26. 
 
 AC. 
 
 11. 
 
 lOD. 
 
 27. 
 
 9H. 
 
 12. 
 
 7C. 
 
 28. 
 
 8C. 
 
 13. 
 
 9C. 
 
 29. 
 
 QC. 
 
 14. 
 
 KS. 
 
 30. 
 
 7D. 
 
 15. 
 
 IOC. 
 
 31. 
 
 AH. 
 
 16. 
 
 lOH. 
 
 32. 
 
 QS. 
 
 Cards are counted from top. 
 
 Cards are counted from back. 
 
 No matter which card B selects, it will always be the 
 twenty-fifth card, counted from the bottom of C*s pack, pro- 
 viding count is begun with the number representing B's card, 
 counted from top, and also, that B takes no higher number 
 than twenty-four for his card, which is not likely to happen, 
 as a lower number is usually selected. Besides this, the 
 conjijrer should artfully suggest that he take not too high a 
 number, giving out as a pretext that too much time would 
 thereby be wasted. In order to be able to repeat the exper- 
 iment, with a change of numbers from twenty-five to twen- 
 ty-two, the conjurer simply transfers the three bottom cards, 
 the Queen of Spades, Ace of Hearts and Seven of Diamonds, 
 from the bottom to the top of C's pack. 
 
194 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The Flying and Obedient Card, 
 
 (HIS FEAT, which is not a trick in itself, ought to 
 be introduced in the preliminary springing and 
 throwing of cards generally executed by profes- 
 sional conjurers, before exhibiting a series of 
 card tricks. 
 
 After the conjurer has tossed a number of cards among 
 the spectators to a distance limited only by the size of the 
 place and his dexterity, he throws one card to a distance of 
 thirty or forty feet, when it is seen to suddenly turn around 
 and return to his hand. As it impossible to perform this by 
 dexterity alone, trickery is resorted to. Through the cen- 
 
 FIG. 125. 
 
 ter of a card a black silk thread A Fig. 125, is passed, 
 after which another card is glued to the lower side of the 
 first one, serving to hold the thread in place, and at the 
 same time increasing the weight of the card. The other 
 end of the thread is fastened in the flies of the stage, the 
 card attached to it being placed at the bottom of the pack, 
 which is laid on the table. The performer picks ^ up the 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 195 
 
 cards and after throwing out as many cards as he desires, 
 finally takes the prepared card and throws it in the same 
 manner as he did the other ones. The card will travel as 
 far as the length of the thread permits and the moment the 
 latter is drawn taut, it will turn around and return to its 
 starting place, the performer catching it as it comes back. 
 
 The conjurer is cautioned not to commit the pardonable 
 error of giving the card the usual "return twist" in act of 
 throwing it, but to toss out the card in a horizontal direc- 
 tion. 
 
 THE NEW MULTIPLICATION OF CARDS. 
 
 IHOSE OF my readers who are acquainted with 
 conjuring literature, are no doubt familiar with 
 the trick of passing several cards from the pocket 
 of one spectator into that of another. By the 
 method that I am about to describe, a much better effect can 
 be obtained than by the older one, but at the same time a 
 greater amount of dexterity and address is required. 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 
 ♦ 
 V 
 
 
 I* ♦!) 
 
 FIG. 126. 
 
 
 FIG. 127. 
 
 A piquet pack of thirty two cards is used in the prefer- 
 ence to a full pack, as by the use of the latter considerable 
 unnecessary time is taken up in counting the cards. Un- 
 
196 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 known to the audience, the performer has four extra cards: 
 say the Ace of Diamonds, Eight of Clubs, Nine of Hearts 
 and Seven of Spades, which he secretly adds to the pack 
 after it has been counted and returned. Below these cards, 
 that is on the former top of the pack, are lying duplicates 
 of these four cards. 
 
 The conjurer goes to a lady and asks her to kindly take 
 from the top of the pack a small heap of cards, but to be 
 careful not to let him see how many she is taking. While 
 intructing her in this manner, he secretly places the little 
 linger of the right. 'hand under the first four cards, at the 
 
 129. 
 
 FIG. 128. FIG. 
 
 same time holding the pack in such a way that the lady is 
 obliged to take off the cards lengthwise. At the moment 
 that she is about to seize them, the conjurer slightly raises 
 the little fiinger, thereby forcing the four cards into her 
 hands. Providing her with a sheet of blank paper and a 
 pencil, he requests her to make a memorandum of the names 
 of the cards that she has taken. The duplicates of the 
 cards just chosen are now on the top of the pack. As it is 
 necessary to palm them off a moment later, the conjurer 
 would have an excellent opportunity to execute this sleight, 
 while walking back to the table, but as it is much more 
 effective to hold the pack by the finger tips and showing 
 the hands to be otherwise empty, the palming may safely be 
 postponed until the last moment. After requesting two 
 gentlemen to step forward and assist him in the experiment, 
 the performer stations one gentleman at each side of the 
 table, on which are lying two empty envelopes. Intro- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 197 
 
 ducing the little finger under the four cards on top, the 
 artist who holds the cards in the left hand, passes the right 
 hand over them, the little finger of the left at the same time 
 propelling the cards lying above it into the palm of the right. 
 The spectator on the left side of the table, at the conjurers 
 request, divides the pack at l-andom into two heaps, which 
 the performer designates as number one and number two. 
 The person to his right is requested to choose one of the 
 two heaps and decides we will suppose, on number two, 
 which is given to the person on the left to count, the num- 
 ber of cards being, say, fourteen. The conjurer picks up 
 these cards and, secretly adding the four palmed cards to 
 them, gives the cards to the person on his left, with the re- 
 quest to enclose them in one of the envelopes and place the 
 envelope, with his own hands, into the other gentleman's 
 pocket. The performer picks up the remaining heap, num- 
 ber one, and slowly counts the cards, the number of course 
 being fourteen also. These he takes to the lady who select- 
 ed the first four cards and, asking her to add her cards to 
 the ones in his hand, secretly introduces the little finger be- 
 low the cards she is replacing. Asking her how many 
 cards she had and upon being told "four," the performer an- 
 swer: "Four and fourteen are eighteen. That is correct, 
 madame. Eighteen cards we have here and fourteen are en- 
 closed iu the gentleman's pocket, which gives us a total of 
 thirty-two, the exact number of the cards of our pack.*' 
 Requesting one of the gentlemen to take the remaining en- 
 velope, while indicating it, the conjurer adroitly propels the 
 four cards above his finger into the palm of the other hand 
 and gives the remaining fourteen cards, supposed by the 
 spectators to be eighteen, to the gentleman on his right, ask- 
 ing him to insert them in the envelope and to place the lat- 
 ter in the pocket of the second gentleman. While this is 
 being done, the conjurer has ample time to dispose of the 
 the palmed cards by dropping them into his profonde. 
 
 He next announces that he will cause the four cards, 
 chosen by the lady, to pass from the last envelope into the 
 
198 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 first one, both of which are now opened and their contents 
 carefully counted. One gentleman will have four cards more 
 than before and the other four less. The lady is then re- 
 quested to read aloud the names of the four cards, which 
 will be found among those possessed by the first spectator, 
 thus proving conclusively that the four cards really per- 
 formed an invisible journey from the pocket of one gentle- 
 man into that of the other. 
 
 Card and Bgg Bala nee. 
 
 I^N THIS trick, or rather juggling feat performed by 
 *^ magical means, a card is balanced on its corner on the 
 fcij magic wand. An egg is then taken and balanced be- 
 side the card (Fig. 130). Finally as a crowning finish 
 to this seemingly wonderful feat, the conjurer places the egg 
 on the upper corner of the card and balances both in this 
 peculiar manner. (Fig. 131.) 
 
 FIG. 130. 
 The properties necessary for the performance of this 
 trick, consist of a wooden or enameled metal wand, (Fig. 132) 
 near one end of which is drilled a fine hole B, while^near its 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 199 
 
 other end a fine needle point A is firmly inserted. 
 
 The card used is a double one, between which is glued a 
 
 FIG. 131. 
 
 PIG. 132, 
 
 steel wire C C, (Fig. 132) the ends of which protrude a trifle 
 at either corner of the card. The ^gg which has a small 
 
200 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 hole D D, drilled in either end, is a wooden imitation. The 
 preparation of these articles having been described, the mys- 
 tery is practically explained. In order to balance the card 
 on the wand, one of its protruding points C C is inserted in 
 the hole B of the latter. The balancing of the egg is easily 
 accomplished by fitting hole D over the needle point A. The 
 balancing of the card on the upper end of the egg or vice 
 versa is a matter equally as easy. In fact the feat would 
 fall comparatively flat, were it not for the acting of the 
 performer, who by the aid of gestures and pretended futile 
 attempts, gives it the appearance of a very difficult feat of 
 equilibrium. 
 
 THE FOUNTAIN OF CARDS. 
 
 |NE OF the prettiest finishes to a card trick is the fol- 
 lowing one: After a card has been selected and 
 shuffled into the pack, the latter is placed on top of 
 a tumbler, standing on the seat of an ordinary chair. 
 The performer then states that he will cause the selected 
 card to leave the pack and to fly into his hand. At the word 
 of command, the cards on the tumbler suddenly fly upward 
 in beautiful fountain like manner, till finally the chosen card 
 appears and jumps into the hand of the conjurer, who im- 
 mediately passes it for inspection. 
 
 The card that is selected, is as usual, a forced one, and 
 after it has been returned to the pack, the latter is placed 
 on the table for a moment, while the performer exhibits the 
 tumbler, tapping it with his wand, to prove that it is unpre- 
 pared. This, however, is but a pretext, serving to substitute 
 for the ordinary cards, a prepared pack lying in readiness 
 upon the table. This exchange, crude as it may seem, is 
 nevertheless an excellent one, as the conjurer simply lays 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 201 
 
 down one pack and immediately picks up another a moment 
 later. The prepared pack is arranged in the same manner, 
 as the one used in the Rising Card Trick, that is, a thread 
 passes alternately above and underneath the cards, this 
 system being maintained throughout the entire pack, which 
 had best consists of fifty two or even more cards. The bot- 
 tom card is a duplicate of the chosen one. The end of the 
 thread, into which a knot is made, is temporarily -attached to 
 the card, by slipping the knot into a short slit in the edge of 
 the card. 
 
 From the pack, the thread leads over another stronger 
 thread, which is stretched horizontally across the stage at a 
 a distance of some six feet above the floor. The first thread 
 then passes to the background and from there through a 
 screw eye to the assistant's hand. 
 
 After the conjurer has placed the cards over the glass 
 on the chair, he holds the hand over the pack, the thread 
 passing between the first and middle fingers, and gives the 
 word of command, at which the assistant gathers in the 
 thread with a steady motion, thereby causing the cards to 
 scatter as described. With the hand at some distance above 
 the tumbler and the thread passing between his fingers, the 
 conjurer waits till the last card is reached, which, being at- 
 tached to the. thread, is pulled right into his hand. 
 
 An improvement on this manner of performing the trick, 
 consists of having the chosen card fly into the performer's 
 hand, while the remaining cards are still going through their 
 evolution. To the thread, interlacing the cards, is attached 
 a short thread, to which the duplicate of the selected card 
 is temporarily attached by simply passing it through two 
 holes made in the card with a rather coarse needle. The 
 pack is then arranged as before, the prepared card being, 
 however, placed in the middle of the pack. When the cards 
 fly about by the agency of the thread, which passes through 
 the performer's fingers, the chosen card is finally reached 
 and flies into his hand, and being but loosely fastened to the 
 thread, the latter continues in its passage, pulling itself out 
 
202 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 of the card, which the conjurer retains. In the meantime, 
 .the remaining cards on the tumber are still continuing their 
 peculiar movements. 
 
 If desired, the performer can dispense with the appear- 
 ance of the chosen card and simply use the trick as an ef- 
 fective finish to an exhibition of flourishes. For this pur- 
 pose, he holds the prepared pack of seventy to eighty cards 
 upright in his hand, the little finger being stationed at the 
 bottom of the cards, the thumb at one side and the remain- 
 ing fingers at the other. The assissant, upon receiving his 
 cue, pulls the thread, not too rapidly, causing the alternate 
 cards in the performer's hand, to fly into the air with pretty 
 effect. 
 
 ^ 
 
 The New Rising Cards From The Hand. 
 
 [HOSE of my readers who are familiar with stand- 
 ard card tricks, no doubt are aquainted with the 
 regular method of causing cards to rise out of the 
 pack, while the latter is held in the right hand. 
 The thumb is stationed at one side of the pack, the third 
 and fourth fingers at its other side, the first and second 
 fingers hidden behind the pack and gradually push up the 
 rear card, which is a selected one, brought to this j^lace by 
 means of the pass. 
 
 An improvement over this method has been invented, by 
 the aid of which the performer is enabled to hold the pack 
 in such manner, so that the thumb and every one of the fin- 
 fiers are in sight at all times. The improvement lies in the 
 use of an extra finger, which is held between the first and 
 second fingers, thereby taking the place of the first finger, 
 which is hidden on the rear side of the cards and which, as 
 in the older method, pushes up the last card. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 203 
 
 In Figs. 133 and 134, the operation is shown as seen 
 from both sides. 
 
 FIG. 133. 
 
 
 m[&^<k 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 FIG. 134. 
 
204 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 
 J 'ROM an examined pack of card, several are selected 
 ^. and replaced in the pack, which the performer holds 
 in his right hand. The chosen cards, at the per- 
 former's command, now rise, one at a time, out of 
 the pack, which is then shown once more. 
 
 The trick in this case depends upon the substitution for 
 the examined pack, of a prepared one, all the cards of 
 which, excepting the first and last, have a hole (A, Fig. 135) 
 cut out of their center. The selected cards, which the con- 
 jurer allows the spectators to retain until the change of 
 
 FIG. 135. 
 packs has been effected, are then inserted at any place in the 
 pack that the spectators may desire. The performer then 
 transfers the rear card of the pack to the front and next 
 seizes the cards by holding the thumb at one side, the first 
 finger at the back and the remaining fingers at the other 
 side of the pack. To cause the cards to rise, he simply in- 
 serts the index finger in hole A and pushes up the first card 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 205 
 
 that comes in contact with it. In the same manner, the re- 
 mainder of the chosen cards is made to rise, after which 
 the former rear card is again transferred from the front to 
 the pack of the prepared pack, which may now be shown 
 from both sides. 
 
 The Cards Rising Through The Air. 
 
 |N THIS form of the Rising Card Trick, the performer 
 ^ holds the pack in the right hand and commands the 
 Ig first one of the selected cards to rise. The card leaves 
 the pack as commanded and is seen floating through the 
 air into the conjurer's left hand, which is held some three 
 feet above the pack. The card is seized, shown from all 
 sides, and the same process repeated with the remaining 
 chosen cards. 
 
 Each one of the cards that rises in this mysterious man- 
 ner, is slightly prepared by gluing on the back two small 
 strips A B cut from cards of a similar design. The strips 
 are bent over in the shape of a hook as indicated in Fig. 136: 
 
 For the sake of distinctness the hooks are made very 
 perceptible in the diagram, although in reality they are 
 hardly noticeable, especially if cards of an intricate pattern 
 are used. These cards, all prepared alike, are concealed 
 about the person of the conjurer, who commences the ex- 
 periment by forcing similar cards. After the forced cards 
 have been returned to the pack, the performer on his way to 
 the table, adds to it the prepared cards, placing them on the 
 top. 
 
 Stretched horizontally across the stage at a distance of 
 about six feet or more from the floor, is a black silk thread 
 A, Fig. 137, directly under which the artist takes his posi- 
 tion. One end of this thread is fastened to a hook behind 
 
206 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 the left wing, while the other end passes through a screw eye 
 attached behind the right wing, and is allowed to hang down 
 
 FIG. 136. 
 
 FIG. 
 
 three or four feet. To this end of the thread is attached a 
 small bag which contains a few shot, the whole arrange- 
 ment simply serving as a weight to pull up the car(L Care 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 207 
 
 must be taken to have the bag just a trifle heavier than one 
 card. 
 
 While stating what is about to take place and indicating 
 the process by a gesture, the performer elevates the left 
 hand and with it brings down the thread to the position A2, 
 and slips it under the hooks, of the rear card, (A B Fig 136) 
 holding the pack rather firmly, so that the card will not 
 make a premature appearance. At the proper time, he 
 slightly relaxes his hold on the cards and the rear one is 
 slowly carried, by the thread, up to the left hand, elevated 
 to receive it, which in bringing down the card, fetches the 
 thread as well. The latter is slipped under the hooks of the 
 next selected card, which is now on the bottom of the pack. 
 Thus all the chosen cards are successively made to rise in 
 the same manner as the first one. 
 
 THE EXCELSIOR RISING CARDS. 
 
 |N THIS trick, we become acquainted with a superior 
 ^ form of the Rising Card Trick, which has the great 
 l| advantage over the other method in that no specially 
 prepared cards are required. After the pack has 
 been given to the spectators with the request to select any 
 cards they desire, and after these cards have been returned 
 to the pack, it is given a vigorous shuffle and placed into a 
 handsome metal case, open at the top, front and back, as 
 shown in Fig. 138. This case is then placed on a small side 
 table or stand, which is not draped in any way and the top 
 of which is comparatively thin, giving the whole an appear- 
 ance which precludes all idea of preparation. 
 
 At the word of command, the first one of the chosen 
 cards rises out of the pack. It is seized by the conjurer, who 
 passes it and also the card case and remaining cards, for in- 
 
208 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 spection, requesting the spectators to shuffle the cards once 
 more, before replacing them in the case, which is then 
 placed on the table and the next card made to rise. This 
 process is repeated until all the chosen cards have made 
 their appearance, the performer freely showing case and 
 cards which are shuffled each time before a card rises. 
 
 The trick, in this instance, lies in the table, the leg of 
 which contains a piston set in motion by a thread, in the 
 hands of an assistant. The piston, rising, causes a curved 
 clock spring to push upward through a small hole in the 
 table top, its points (B B, Pig. 138) engaging the top card, 
 
 FIG. 138. 
 which is one of the chosen ones, forcing it up and out. As 
 this happens on the rear side of the pack, the process is 
 neither seen nor suspected by the company. As the per- 
 former removes the risen card, the assistant relaxes his hold 
 on the thread attached to the piston, which recedes within 
 the table leg and carries with it the clock spring fastened to 
 its upper end. In this manner all the chosen cards are suc- 
 cessively made to rise. 
 
 The method of discovering what cards have been chosen, 
 is rather unique. The pack that is handed to the spectators 
 with the request to chose from it any cards they like^ is an 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 209 
 
 unprepared one, which, however, is adroitly changed by 
 the performer for a narrower pack, while the selected cards 
 are still in the possession of the spectators. These cards, 
 when replaced in the narrow pack, can easily be distin- 
 guished from the others on account of being a shade wider. 
 So, all the conjurer has to do after the pack has been re- 
 turned to him, is to make the pass at a wide card, thus 
 bringing it to the top of the pack and placing it to the rear 
 in the case. If the performer is at all skillful, he can as- 
 certain the names of the chosen cards from the spectators, 
 and before replacing the cards in the case, bring the card 
 he desires to have rise next, to the back of the pack by 
 means of the pass. 
 
 ^ 
 
 THE RISING CARDS AND TUMBLER. 
 
 jPTER a number of cards have been selected, they 
 are returned to the pack, which is then shuffled 
 and placed, for the time being, on the table. The 
 conjurer then introduces an ordinary tumbler, 
 which is just large enough to contain the cards, which are 
 then placed into it. Retiring, at some distance, the per- 
 former asks the first person who took a card, for its name, 
 and upon being informed, commands the card to rise out of 
 the pack. His command is instantly obeyed, whereupon, he 
 seizes the card and immediately passes it for inspection. In 
 the same manner, the other cards rise out of the glass, and 
 finally, both pack and glass are examined to prove absence 
 of all preparation. 
 
 The cards used are, of course, forced and are placed in- 
 differently in the pack, which is laid down while the perfor- 
 mer exhibits the glass, into which the cards are then placed : 
 but not the first pack, but another one lying next to it on 
 
210 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 the table. The substituted pack is prepared in the following 
 manner: In the upper edge of the first card a slit is made- 
 into which is engaged the end of a fine black thread, which 
 is prevented from being pulled out by a knot, in the end of 
 it. This thread passes over the back of this card and upon 
 it is then placed a duplicate of the last card, that the con- 
 jurer intends to force. The thread is led upward on the 
 back of the last card, and passing over the top of an indif, 
 ferent card and down its back, a duplicate of the next card is 
 then laid on the thread, which passes up and over another 
 indifferent card. This process is continued until all selected 
 cards are so arranged in the pack, that a pull on the thread 
 will cause them to rise in succession, while the indifferent 
 cards over which the thread passes, are left undisturbed. 
 When the prepared pack has been inserted in the tumbler, it 
 is an easy matter for the assistant, in the possession of the 
 end of the thread, to cause the cards to rise at the perfor- 
 mer's command. After the last card has risen, the conjurer 
 with the right hand takes the pack out of the glass, seizing 
 the latter with the left hand, and advances towards the com- 
 pany to show that the cards and tumbler are unprepared. 
 The assistant retains his hold on the thread, thereby pulling 
 it out of the slit in the first card, and thus removes all traces 
 of the modus operandi. 
 
 If the performer desires to dispense with the assistant, 
 he must have fastened to the end of the thread a bent black 
 pin, which is secretly hooked into the trousers. , Retiring to 
 a distance sufficient for the thread to become taut, he com- 
 mands the first card to rise, at the same time retreating a 
 trifle, thereby causing the card to be forced out by the thread. 
 Showing this card and placing it on the table, he again 
 moves backwards and causes the next card to rise, continu- 
 ing in this manner until all the cards have appeared. Final- 
 ly he secretly detaches the hook from his trousers and in re- 
 moving the cards from the glass, pulls the thread out of the 
 slit in the front card. 
 
 CS3 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 211 
 
 A COMEDY OF ERRORS. 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 jHIS IS is the same trick that has just been describ - 
 ed, with the addition that every card that rises, 
 undergoes same transformation during the opera- 
 tion. The first card that ascends, usually a Jack, 
 comes out with its back towards the company, and upon be- 
 ing reprimanded for this offense, visibly turns around and 
 then continues rising with its face towards the spectators. 
 The second card to the performer's obvious consternation, 
 is a blank one, which however changes into the selected 
 card. The third card has a corner missing, which at the 
 conjurer's command instantly appears on it. 
 
 The cards used for the experiment, are mechanical ones, 
 a detailed description of which will be found under the pro- 
 per heading. The first card is the Turning Card, the second 
 one, a card constructed on the same principle, excepting that 
 the back of the flap on the upper half of the card is white, 
 causing the card to appear blank, as it rises. The last card 
 is the Improved Torn Corner Card, consisting of an ordin- 
 ary card, over the corner of which has been placed a pocket, 
 made of black silk. 
 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 
 In this improved form of the last trick, every card after 
 having performed its particular evolution, is immediately 
 passed for examination. Besides, an additional effect is in- 
 troduced, the picture of one of the cards, loosens itself from 
 the card proper and makes a bow to the company. 
 
 The cards employed are constructed on the same princi- 
 ple, as employed in the first version of the trick, with this 
 addition that the mechanical part is separable from the card 
 proper. In this respect they are identical with the Nonpa- 
 reil Changing Card, the card proper being passed for inspec- 
 tion, while the trick part is kept concealed in the perfor- 
 
212 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 mer's hand. Fig. 139 illustrates the construction of the card 
 with the loosening picture. Over the upper half of the card 
 a closely fitting pocket is slipped, to the lower edge, of 
 which is hinged, by means of a strip of muslin, the picture 
 A which thus appears to loosen itself from the margin of the 
 card, when half way out. Seizing this card and transferring 
 it to the left hand, the conjurer draws off the pocket, keeping 
 it palmed in the right. The card is then given to a specta- 
 tor with the request to examine it. 
 
 FIG. 139. 
 The Turning Card Fig. 140 has a similar pocket C to 
 which the flap D is glued. By means of an elastic hinge in 
 the middle of the card, which has previously been folded 
 longitudinally through its center, the flap D instantly re- 
 sumes its normal position, being released as soon as the up- 
 per half of the cards protrudes above the pack. The pocket 
 C is retained in the right hand of the performer, while with 
 the left, the unprepared card is given out and made to bear 
 all the examination. The third one which transforms itself 
 from a blank card into a court card, is constructed similar to 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 213 
 
 the Turning Card, except that instead of the back of the 
 llap representing a card, it is made of white paper and ap- 
 pears blank until the change occurs. 
 
 The last card, a corner of which is magically restored, 
 
 FIG. 140. 
 is the Improved Torn Corner Card already mentioned in the 
 last trick. After the black pocket has been jerked off by 
 the assistant pulling the thread attached thereto, the card 
 can be subjected to a thorough examination. 
 
 THIRD METHOD. 
 
 HE TWO automatic trick cards 
 
 describe, can be 
 
 that I am about to 
 in 
 
 used to excellent advantage 
 
 combination with the first method of the present 
 trick. 
 
 One of the selected cards is the Seven of Hearts. Up- 
 on being told to make its appearance, the Eight of Hearts 
 is seen to rise instead. The performer apologizes for the 
 mistake and commands the Eight to visibly change into a 
 Seven, which it instantly does. The next card to rise is the 
 
214 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 Eight of Diamonds, but here another error occurs, for in- 
 stead of the Eight, the Seven of Diamonds ascends. Not, at 
 all disconcerted by these mistakes, the performer explains 
 that the spirits have evidently confused matters and orders 
 the missing pip of the card to appear, which command is im- 
 mediately obeyed. 
 
 As my readers have no doubt correctly surmised, the 
 cards employed are mechanical, and are set in operation by 
 the cards themselves in leaving the pack. The first card is 
 a version of the Moving Pip Card, a fine silk thread being 
 substituted for the usual three hairs, which would be too del- 
 icate for this form of the trick. This card is not backed as 
 usual, its rear side behind which the mechanism is conceal - 
 
 FIG. 141. 
 
 ed, being left open, Reference to Fig. 141, will make the 
 construction of the card apparent. The thread to which the 
 block F is fastened, passes through loop E, thence upwards 
 and through hole C to the face of the card. It is led 
 through the moving pip A, and thence through the. hole D 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 215 
 
 in the stationary pip B, back to the block E to which it is 
 again attached the thread, thus practically forming an end- 
 less belt. 
 
 Fig. 142 gives a front view of the card, behind which 
 is placed an indifferent card, to the upper corner of which a 
 block has been glued, the object of which is that when the 
 mechanical card has risen about an inch and a half, the 
 block F will strike the projection on the card behind it, and 
 will cause pip A to travel to B, as the card ascends. 
 
 The construction of the next card is more difficult to 
 explain, although readily apparent upon inspection of the 
 card itself. In the front of the card, at the place which the 
 eighth pip should occupy, a hole (Al, Fig. 143) is cut On the 
 
 FIG. 142. 
 back of this card is then glued another card, with a rectangu- 
 lar hole (BBBB, Fig. 144) cut out of it. Under this card works 
 a slide, indicated by the smaller rectangle of dotted lines in 
 BBBB. On the front side of the upper end of the slide, at A2, 
 red paper is glued, while the lower end of the slide is cov- 
 
216 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 FIG. 144. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 21; 
 
 ered with white paper, so that the card, when set for the 
 trick, represents a Seven of Diamonds. In the slide, two in- 
 cisions are made, resulting in the triangle E, which is then 
 bent over as shown. Over these cards, is glued another 
 card, out of which is cut a hole, indicated by the continuous 
 lines of the smallest rectangle in BBBB. As the card, thus 
 prepared, rises out of the pack and gets beyond flap E, 
 which serves as a latch, the latter returns to its normal 
 place and the fine elastic, DD, pulls down the movable slide 
 on the inside of the card, thus causing the red part, A2, of 
 the slide to occupy the position Al, changing the Seven into 
 an Eight of Diamonds. 
 
 THB HAND OF CAGLIOSTRO. 
 
 Pl^ THIS version of the Rising Card Trick, the pack is 
 wok inserted in a goblet, at a little distance from which is 
 placed a similar but empty goblet. Across the top of 
 both is laid an imitation hand (Fig. 145), made of 
 
 Hli 
 
 FIG. 145. 
 
 papier macJie, to which the performer attributes wonderful 
 properties. At his command, the hand picks the selected 
 
218 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 cards out of the pack in the goblet. 
 
 As already mentioned, the trick is simply a clever modi- 
 fication of the Tumbler and Rising Cards, explained else- 
 where, the pack, placed in the goblet, being prepared with 
 a thread. 
 
 The first three fingers of the hand are connected thereto 
 by a cloth hinge, so that when the assistant pulls the thread 
 and the first card rises, the latter will force the hinged fin- 
 gers upwards, thus creating the appearance of the hand 
 picking out the card. The same process is repeated with 
 the remaining cards. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 219 
 
 ?i^epkt^ed kr)d >Iecl)ai|i6kl Caf d^, 
 
 ^^MN account of the number of cards which belong un- 
 ^MmM J der this class, I have decided to devote a special 
 chapter to their description. Mechanically arranged 
 and otherwise prepared cards, are frequently used 
 with excellent effect by the professional conjurer. They 
 will also prove of great servive to the amateur, as some as- 
 tonishing tricks may be performed by their aid, without re- 
 quiring much dexterity on the part of the performer. A 
 few words of caution, however, may not be out of place. 
 In the first place, all mechanical cards used by the conjurer 
 should have the same backs as those of the ordinary cards 
 employed in his experiments. Secondly, the performer 
 should avoid the successive use of several inechanical cards, 
 arranging his program in such a way, that several feats with 
 ordinary cards precede the one in which the prepared card 
 is used. Lastly, the magician must learn to make an adroit 
 substitution of the ordinary card for the prepared one, by 
 means of one of the several changes, -described in the first 
 chapter of this book. 
 
220 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 THE CHANGING CARD, 
 
 jN THIS, one of the oldest forms of mechanical cards, 
 
 the Queen of Hearts is made to change into the Queen 
 
 || of Clubs and vice versa. The card used consists of the 
 
 following parts: 
 
 1st. — A Queen of Hearts from which have been cut the 
 
 sections A, A, Fig. 146. 
 
 2d. — A specially prepared skeleton card, shown in Fig. 
 147, one corner representing Hearts, the other, Clubs. The 
 margin of this card must be raised by gluing thereon the 
 the margins cut from two or three other cards. 
 
 FIG. 146. 
 
 3d. — A specially prepard half card, illustrated in Fig. 
 148, -designed to slide up and down within the marginal 
 frame of the skeleton card. On the center of the back of 
 this piece is glued a small block with which to move it up 
 and down to effect the change. ^^ 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 221 
 
 4th. — A common card, through the center of which has 
 been cut longitudinally a narrow slot D (Fig. 149) about two 
 inches in length. 
 
 These parts are assembled in the following order: 
 
 FIG. 147. 
 
 The common card, with the slot D, is laid face upwards; 
 on this is placed the card shown in Fig. 147, with its face 
 
 FIG. 148. 
 and thickened margin uppermost; within the frame is placed 
 the small card, Fig. 148, the small block thereon protruding 
 through the slot D; finally, on the raised frame and over 
 
222 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS, 
 
 the half card, is placed the prepared Queen (Fig. 146). 
 These parts, being thus assembled, are all glued firmly to- 
 gether, with the exception that the small card. Fig. 148, 
 must be free to move up and down on the inside, by manipu- 
 lation of the small block on the rear, and thereby change 
 the spots that appear on the corners of the Queen. 
 
 FIG. 149. 
 
 The usual method of utilizing this card in the course of 
 some trick, is to force the Queen of Clubs and have it shuf- 
 fled into the pack. The performer then pretends to pick out 
 the selected card, but exhibits the Queen of Hearts instead; 
 whereupon, he is informed that the Queen of Cubs has been 
 chosen, not the Queen of Hearts. Stating that it is an easy 
 matter to correct the mistake, he moves the slide and shows 
 that the wrong card has changed into the desired one. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 223 
 
 THE UNIQUE CHANGING CABn. 
 
 DEPENDING on the same principle as the preceding, 
 is the Unique Changing Card, which is no doubt 
 one of the best of all mechanical cards, as a Queen 
 of Hearts, in an indetectable manner, changes 
 into the Jack of Spades. Both cards are so different in ap- 
 pearance, that even the most astute of spectators will be 
 puzzled by this visible change. 
 
 FIG. 150. 
 Parts A, A Pig. 150, are neatly cut from a Jack of 
 Spades. Another Jack of Spades, and Queen of Hearts are 
 cut in halves, one of each, B, C Fig. 151, being then pasted 
 on an indifferent card. Around the edge of this card, a card 
 board frame of the width of the margin is then glued, in 
 which the slide Pig. 152, consisting of parts of each card, 
 can easily move up and down, midway between the top and 
 bottom as shown in Eig. 153. The frame on this last card is 
 
224 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 evenly covered with glue and the prepared Jack of Spades, 
 Fig. 150, is neatly placed over it. In the rear card B C, Fig. 
 151, a slot F has been cut to correspond with a plug glued on 
 
 FIG. 151. 
 
 FIG. 152. 
 
 the back of slide D E, Fig. 152, • By moving the latter up- 
 ward, a Queen of Hearts is represented and by moving it 
 downwards the Jack of Spades is shown. -^ 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 225 
 
 FIG. 153. 
 
 The Diminishing Card, 
 
 |FTER exhibiting a court card of the original size, 
 the performer, by passing his hand over it, causes 
 it to diminish to half of its original size. Taking 
 this miniature card in his hand, he makes it disap- 
 pear, and reproduces it from any part of his body. Holding 
 it by one hand, and showing the card from both sides, he 
 breathes on it and it is seen to suddenly resume it former 
 size. 
 
 The card used is one that folds in the center, having 
 the tendency to spring back into its former shape on account 
 of two flat elastic strips glued on its inside. On the upper 
 
226 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 half of the back of this card is glued a court card of half the 
 size of the first. Under the pretense of rubbing or stroking 
 this card, the performer folds the upper half over the lower 
 one and exhibits the card in its reduced form. The com- 
 plete vanishing of the diminished card depends upon an ap- 
 parent transfer of the card from the right into the left hand, 
 the card being really retained in the right. The closed left 
 hand is slowly opened with a rubbing movement and shown 
 to be empty. Placing the right hand, in which the folded 
 card is concealed, to his sleeve, the conjurer pretends to 
 take the card from there, afterwards restoring it to its full 
 size by allowing the card to expand, at the same time breath- 
 ing upon it. 
 
 The Latest Diminishing Card. 
 
 [HE TRICK that I am about to explain, is a vast im- 
 provement over the one just described, for the 
 very reason, that the card is made to diminish 
 four times, finally vanishing altogether. Another 
 advantage is that only one hand is used during the trick. 
 
 The construction of the card is as follows : The large 
 court card is first cut into four pieces of equal size, which 
 are then glued on a piece of sheet rubber of the size of 
 the card itself. Fig. 154. When the glue has dried, three 
 smaller cards are glued on the back of the card as shown in 
 Pig. 155. Another card of the same size as the two small 
 cards in Fig. 1 55, is then treated in exactly the same way, 
 being first cut in four and mounted on sheet rubber. Fig. 156, 
 and then having three smaller cards glued on its back. Fig. 
 157. The small card is concealed in the left hand, while the 
 large card, is held in the right. Waving the latter up and 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 99 
 
 Z( 
 
 \-»^^ 
 
 FIG. 154. 
 
 FIG- 155- 
 
228 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 down once or twice, the conjurer under cover of this motion, 
 quickly folds the half of the large card over the other half 
 and exhibits the second or half sized card. Again the hand 
 is moved up and down, the folded card is doubled once more 
 and seems thus to have been reduced to one-fourth the size 
 of the large card. The critical moment of the trick is now 
 at hand, for the small card concealed in the left hand is next 
 to be substituted for the folded one. The best plan by 
 which to do this, is to place the left hand over the right 
 under the pretext of squeezing the card, the palmed card be- 
 
 B 
 
 M 
 
 — - — 1 
 
 
 
 
 FIG. 156. 
 
 FIG. 157. 
 
 ing left on top of the other. The top card, that is the one 
 not doubled, is then visibly placed in the left hand, the fold- 
 ed card remaining concealed in the right, which is disposed 
 of immediately. 
 
 By the process already described, the reduction in size 
 continues; next, to one-eighth, and at last to a sixteenth of 
 of .the size of the original card. Finally the folded card is 
 made to disappear by apparently transferring it from one 
 hand to the other. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 229 
 
 The Changing anil Diminishing Card. 
 
 [HE card of the above title is a particularly clever 
 one, for the reason that at the end of the trick, 
 there is left nothing for the spectator to examine, 
 the card having vanished altogether. 
 The effect of the trick is as follows: A Seven of Dia- 
 monds is shown and, upon being rubbed, changes into the 
 Jack of Hearts. The latter is rubbed and, upon removal of 
 the hand, is seen to have become half its former size. Af- 
 ter showing the small card from both sides, the conjurer 
 causes it to vanish altogether. 
 
 FIG. 158. 
 
 The construction of this card is very simple, being 
 Identical with that of the Flap Card, minus the usual elastics. 
 It has an addition, consisting of a card half the usual size, 
 which is glued on the back of the Flap Card, In Fig. 158, 
 
230 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 the side representing the Seven of Diamonds is to the rear; 
 B, when folded down, shows as the Jack of Hearts; C is 
 the small Jack and D the back of the card. Thus, the Seven 
 of Diamonds is first shown and the upper flap turned down 
 under cover of the hand, the Jack of Hearts thus be- 
 coming revealed. This is folded down and the small card is 
 shown from both sides. The usual process is then repeated, 
 of pretending to place the card from the right into the left 
 hand, but really retaining it in the latter, with which the artist 
 reaches for the wand lying on the table, at the same time 
 dropping the folded card on the servante. With the wand, 
 the closed left hand is then touched, slowly opened and seen 
 to be empty. 
 
 Tlie Changing and Enlarging Card. 
 
 jHIS effective feat, the climax of which usually 
 creates considerable merriment, is exhibited to its 
 best advantage in connection with the following 
 sleight of hand trick. 
 After two cards, say the Eight of Spades and the Queen 
 of Clubs, have been forced upon the spectators and shuffled 
 into the pack, the conjurer takes any card — say the Six of 
 Hearts — and, by rubbing it, proceeds to change it into the 
 the first one of the selected cards; namely, the Eight of 
 Spades. This he transforms, by the same process, into the 
 remaining chosen card, the Queen of Clubs. Pretending to 
 hear that some one in the back rows is not able to see these 
 changes, he offers to make the card larger. Passing his 
 hand over the Queen of Clubs, it is seen to become three 
 times its former size; which unexpected transformation, as I 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 231 
 
 have already said, generally provokes a laugh on the part 
 of the spectators. 
 
 In Figs. 159 and 160, the construction of the trick card 
 is illustrated. On the back of the large Queen of Clubs 
 (Fig. 160), which is printed on white muslin, three ordinary 
 cards (Fig. 159) are glued, elastic hinges being previously 
 
 FIG. 159. 
 inserted, so that the large card can be folded up and will re- 
 sume its former shape, when released. 
 
 The folded card is concealed uhder the vest of the per- 
 former, w^ho then proceeds to force the Eight of Spades and 
 Queen of Clubs. These cards are replaced in the pack and 
 thoroughly shuffled. On his return to the table, he secretly 
 obtains possession of the vested card and adds it to the pack. 
 
232 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The Six of Hearts, which he takes from the pack a moment 
 later, is one phase of the prepared card which, by turning 
 around, is easily changed into the Eight of Spades, the 
 first of the chosen cards. Under pretense of rubbing the 
 
 FIG. 160. 
 
 latter, the performer allows the card to partly expand un- 
 der cover of the hand, and, after folding the Six of Hearts 
 under the Queen of Clubs, shows the latter. Holding the 
 folded card by the ends, he states his intention of making 
 it larger, suddenly allowing it to expand with the aforesaid 
 result. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 233 
 
 The New Quadruple Changing Card, 
 
 iPON rubbing a card, shown to be the Ace of Hearts, 
 with the right hand, the card is seen to become 
 transformed ino the Jack of Diamonds. This 
 gives place to the Three of Diamonds, which a 
 moment latej is changed into the Queen of Spades and, if 
 desired, can be turned back into the first card shown, the Ace 
 of Hearts. 
 
 FIG. 161. FIG. 162. 
 
 In constructing this novel changing card, a Queen of 
 Spades and a Jack of Diamonds are first cut into exact 
 halves, each one of which, by means of sheet rubber, is at- 
 tached to either end of an Ace of Hearts and a Three of 
 Diamonds, as illustrated in Figs. 161 and 162. The two sets 
 
234 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 are then neatly glued together and allowed to dry thor- 
 oughly. 
 
 The elastic hinges, formed by the insertion of the sheet 
 rubber strips, give the card the tendency to assume the 
 position shown in our drawing. To prepare the card for 
 the trick, the two Jacks of Diamonds (flaps A, A) are first 
 folded over on the back of the card; the side B is then 
 shown to be the Ace of Hearts. Under cover of the other 
 hand, the card is secretly turned around and seen to have 
 changed into the Jack of Diamnds, the flaps being held 
 down by one of the fingers to prevent them from flying up. 
 Again pretending to rub the card, the performer releases 
 the flaps, which instantly assume the position shown in the 
 illustration, and which are then, one at a time, folded over 
 on the back of the card, which is now shown to have become 
 the Three of Diamonds. The card is again turned around 
 under cover of the hand, and the last change, the Queen of 
 Spades is exhibited. 
 
 Before and after the trick, the folded card is placed under 
 the pack on the table, the flaps being thereby prevented 
 from prematurely expanding. 
 
 THE CARD AND ROSE. 
 
 CARD, preferably the Queen of Hearts, is exhib- 
 ited and covered an instant, with the other hand, 
 during which process it changes into a beautiful 
 rose, which, if desired, may be changed back 
 into the card. 
 
 The card (Fig. 163) of course is a prepared one, which 
 by means of elastic hinges, is arranged in such a manner 
 that its upper and lower parts, A and C, can be folded on B, 
 instantly resuming their former position the moment the 
 pressure is released. _ 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 235 
 
 FIG. 164. 
 
236 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 On the back of B are glued a handsome artificial rose 
 and a few leaves, which in all occupy about the same space 
 as the card itself (Fig. 164). 
 
 In performing the trick, the card is held by the tip of 
 the thumb and first finger of the left hand. In placing the 
 right hand over the latter, part C is folded on B and 
 then A on C. The folded card is now turned around, the 
 hand is removed and the rose is exhibited. If it is desired 
 to change the latcer back into the card, the process just des- 
 cribed is simply reversed. 
 
 THE FLORAL CARD. 
 
 iN THIS form of the Rose Card Trick, the card which 
 is transformed into the flower, is shown from both 
 sides before and after the trick. The construction of 
 the card is very simple, the flower used being one of 
 
 PIG. 165. 
 folding kind, which when opened fully as shown in Pig. 165, 
 presents the appearance of a large floral ball. The card 
 used is a double one, (Fig. 166) only the lower halves^(C, D) 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 287 
 
 of which are glued together, while the upper halves (A, B), 
 which are scored at their union so as to fold down without 
 breaking, are left open. To the back of the upper halves A 
 and B, is glued the folding flower, which is made of tinted 
 tissue paper, thus presenting a pretty appearance. With A 
 and B folded against each other, the card may be freely 
 
 FIG. 166. 
 shown from both sides, as it is only a trifle thicker than two 
 ordinary cards. Both hands are placed together, A and B 
 are turned down under their cover and the card has ap- 
 parently vanished, the floral ball having taken its place. 
 By reversing the operation, the flower is changed into th e 
 card. 
 
238 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The Penetrative Card, 
 
 ^^N THIS illusive trick, a card is gradually pushed 
 through the crown of a silk hat. The card, which 
 must be a court card, is prepared for the trick by 
 drawing, with the edge of a sharp penknife, three 
 lines across its face as shown in Fig. 167. The card thus 
 scored, may be folded on these lines and opened again with- 
 out any traces of the scoring being visible. On the back of 
 this card is then glued a piece of the same silk material, 
 used in the manufacturing of silk hats or if that is not ob- 
 
 ^oT^T^A^. 
 
 FIG. 167. 
 
 tainable, a good quality of black satin may be substituted. 
 When this has dried, the projecting edges of the cloth are 
 neatly trimmed, after which the entire edge of the card is 
 blackened, so that the card when placed face downwards on 
 the crown of a silk hat, cannot be seen. 
 
 The performer introduces the trick by borrowing a silk 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 239 
 
 hat, secretly placing the prepared card on the crown as he 
 returns to the table, where he deposits the hat. He then 
 forces a duplicate of the prepared card and seizing the 
 hat with his right hand, places the left hand, which holds 
 the selected card, on its inside, quickly slipping the card 
 under the leather band of the hat. At the same time the 
 right hand turns up part A of the card, in illustrated in Fig. 
 
 n^ 
 
 FIG. 168. 
 
 168. Giving the hat a slight downward motion and at the 
 same time sliding the card a little more towards the center 
 of the crown, the second part B of the card is raised; the 
 same process being then repeated with the last parts C and D, 
 when the entire card has thus become visible and is care- 
 lessly thrown face upwards on the table. 
 
 If properly performed, the illusion of the card being 
 gradually pulled through the crown of the hat, will be found 
 to be perfect. 
 
 Tn^ TORN corneh card. 
 
 iFTER A card, say the King of Hearts, has been 
 drawn, the Qonjurer tears off one of its corners 
 and states that he will restore the card to its for- 
 mer condition by use of magical means. Holding 
 the cards by the fingfer tips of the left hand, he takes the 
 
240 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 FIG. 169. 
 
 FIG. 170. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 241 
 
 corner with the right and pretends to throw it at the card. 
 At the same moment the card in the left hand, is seen to be- 
 come restored and is immediately shown from both sides. 
 
 The selected or rather forced King of Hearts in the first 
 place, is adroitly changed for a duplicate, mechanical card 
 by means of the Bottom Change. 
 
 In Figures 169 and 170, both sides of the trick card are 
 shown. A represents the missing corner. B is a hinged flap, 
 to the upper corner of which the corner A is neatly pasted. 
 By means of the two elastics, E, E, glued between the cards 
 proper and flap B, the latter is given the tendency to fold 
 over on C, being prevented in this by a very small metal 
 clip, slipped over the edge of the flap B and the card. At 
 the same moment that the right hand pretends to throw the 
 detached corner against the card, one of the fingers of the 
 left hand removes the clip, and flap B instantly flies over 
 against C, thereby restoring the corner. The card if accu- 
 rately made, can then safely be shown from both sides at a 
 distance of only a few feet. 
 
 The Improved Torn Corner Card. 
 
 ;HILE the card just described is especially suit- 
 able for use in the parlor, the improved form 
 of the trick is better adapted for places, where 
 the exhibition takes place at some distance 
 from the audience. In this method of the trick, the card 
 after its corner has been restored, is immediately passed out 
 for inspection. 
 
 For this purpose, a small pocket A Fig. 171, made of 
 thin metal, painted black, or a black satin pocket is slipped 
 over one of the upper corners of the card, which, when 
 viewed from a little distance, presents the appearance as if 
 
242 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 the corner is missing, especially when the conjurer holds 
 the card in such a way, that his black dress coat is directly 
 behind it. In order to appear to restore the card, all that is 
 necessary is to remove the pocket, which is easily accom- 
 plished by pulling the tine thread B, attached to it. The 
 
 W 
 
 A 
 
 f 
 
 tZ/o/fi^^^^- 
 
 I: 
 W 
 
 FIG. 171. 
 
 best manner of introducing the trick is to force a duplicate 
 of the prepared card and then substitute one for the other, 
 at the same time holding a corner, torn from another card, 
 over the black pocket. A pretense is made of tearing off a 
 corner, the loose piece being exhibited instead, the pocket 
 over the corner of the card completing the deception. The 
 trick is then finished in the manner already described. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 243 
 
 THE FLAP CARD. 
 
 I HE card of this name is perhaps one of the best 
 known of mechanical cards and is still extensively 
 used in connection with many card tricks. A court 
 card, say the Jack of Hearts, is first exhibited 
 from both sides. Requesting a lady to breathe on it, or do- 
 ing so himself, the conjurer causes the card to visibly change 
 into an entirely difierent card (in our case, the Three of 
 Hearts), both sides of which are then also shown. 
 
 The trick of course, lies in the card, which is constructed 
 on the following plan: 
 
 FIG. 172. 
 Across the width of the back of the Three of Hearts, 
 a slight incision is made, which allows the card to be folded 
 in half. Two strips of flat, white elastic are then glued to 
 the lower end of the back of this card, and after being 
 stretched a trifle, their ends are glued to the upper end of 
 the card. The lower end of this folding card is then glued 
 to the Jack of Hearts, after which, half of another Jack of 
 
244 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 Spades is glued to the back of the Three of Hearts. The 
 finished card appears as shown in Pig. 172, which, for the 
 sake of clearness, represents the Jack of Hearts in the act 
 of folding upwards and exposing the Three of Hearts. In 
 its normal condition, the false flap of the court card lies 
 folded against the court card proper. 
 
 To set the card for the trick, the flap is folded down, 
 being prevented from flying back by one of the fingers of 
 the hand holding the card, which is shown to be the Jack of 
 Hearts. In the act of breathing upon it the performer re- 
 leases the elastic flap, which immediately flies back into its 
 former position, disclosing the Three of Hearts. 
 
 Two flap cards, one which produces a change of a Three 
 of Hearts into a Jack of Hearts and the other one of which 
 the reverse change, that is Jack of Hearts into the Three of 
 Hearts, are sometimes used to produce the following effect. 
 The flaps of both cards, one of w^hich is held in each hand, 
 are turned down, thus showing the Three in one hand and 
 the Jack in the other. A quick motion is made with both 
 hands, and the Jack is seen in the hand that held the Three 
 a moment ago and vice versa. 
 
 The Nonpareil Changing Card. 
 
 FEATURE which makes the card of this name, 
 the peer of all mechanical cards, is that after the 
 changes, it can be thoroughly examined without 
 any preparation being discovered. The Nonpa- 
 reil Card (Fig. 173) is practically a flap card changing from 
 the Three of Spades into the Queen of Diamonds, the only 
 difference being, that the latter is removable from the me- 
 chanical part of the card, simply being contained in a pocket 
 attached to the rear side of the folding Three of Spades. On 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 245 
 
 the other half of the back of the latter is glued a half of 
 another Queen of Diamonds. 
 
 The Three of Spades is first exhibited. Under cover of 
 the other hand which, for a moment is placed over it, the 
 upper flap A is turned down and the Queen of Diamonds 
 shown, the thumb being held over the dividing line of the 
 
 FIG. 173. 
 Queen of Diamonds and the pocket on its lower half. The 
 card is now apparently transferred to the other hand, but in 
 reality this last hand seizes the Queen B, an ordinary card 
 and pulls it out of its pocket C, which with its folding flap re- 
 mains palmed in the first hand, to be secretly dropped into 
 the profonde while the spectators are inspecting the unpre- 
 pared Queen of Diamonds. 
 
246 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 The New Nonpareil Card, 
 
 jN THIS improved form of the -trick, the card has in- 
 stead of one flap, two; one on either side as shown in 
 Fig. 174. B represents the loose card, C the pocket, 
 and A and D the flaps. 
 In performing the trick, side A is first exhibited. Un- 
 der cover of the other hand, which is momentarily placed 
 over it, the card is turned around and side D is shown. This 
 
 FIG. 174. 
 flap is then turned down, under the pretext of rubbing the 
 card, revealing the upper half of card B, the lower half of 
 which is apparently completed by a half of a similar card, 
 pasted on the back of D, the thumb being held over the 
 junction of the pocket C and card B. The card is now trans- 
 ferred to the left hand, the loose card being pulled out of C 
 during this operation. While it is being exhibited, the right 
 hand, in which the folded card was retained, disposes of the 
 latter at the first opportunity which offers itself. _^^ 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 THE BOTTLE CARD. 
 
 247 
 
 |N THE back of a card, say the Five of Spades, two 
 insertions are made, as indicated by the dotted lines 
 in Pig. 175. The card may then be folded into the 
 shape shown in Fig. 176. Two strips of flat elas- 
 tic are then glued across the back of this card, which pre- 
 paration is entirely hidden by pasting over the elastic bands 
 the back of another card, previously cut into three similar 
 pieces. 
 
 ♦1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ♦ 
 
 1 
 1 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 .♦1 
 
 V ! 
 
 J5 
 
 1 J 
 
 FIG. 175. 
 
 A card thus constructed, may be folded as shown in Pig. 
 176, but as soon as it is released, will spring out flat. 
 
 Prior to the trick, the conjurer inserts one end of the 
 folded card into a small clip attached to the rear edge of the 
 table, the clip preventing the card from prematurely ex- 
 panding. The performer then borrows a handkerchief, 
 which he carelessly spreads on the table. He next introdu- 
 ces a narrow necked bottle, of transparent glass, which, af- 
 
248 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 ter being shown empty, is covered with the borrowed hand- 
 kerchief. In picking up the latter, the conjurer removes 
 the card from the clip and adroitly inserts it, still folded, in 
 the neck of the bottle, while arranging the handkerchief 
 over the latter. In placing the bottle, with a slight thump, 
 on the table, the card falls on the inside and instantly ex- 
 pands. 
 
 FIG. 176. 
 A similar card is now forced on a spectator and, after 
 being placed in a card box or other suitable apparatus, dis- 
 appears from the latter and, upon removal of the handker- 
 chief, is found in the bottle, which must be broken in order 
 to extract the card. If properly made, the card can now be 
 shotvn from both sides without any preparation being no- 
 ticed. If some one expresses a desire to examine it, the 
 performer immediately exchanges it for a duplicate, un- 
 prepared card, which must be lying in readiness on the top 
 of the pack for such an emergency. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 249 
 
 Iflie Conjurer As Marksman, 
 
 10 PROVE his aptitude in other fields than that of 
 conjuring, the performer demonstrates his ability 
 as a marksman, by standing before a mirror and 
 holding a revolver or pistol over his shoulder and 
 shooting a hole through the center of the Ace of Hearts, 
 held by a spectator. 
 
 Those of my readers who wish to perform this feat with- 
 out devoting several months of target practice to acquire it, 
 can either purchase or manufacture for themselves, what is 
 called a Bullet Card, the construction of which is shown in 
 Figs. 177 and 178. 
 
 FIG. 177. 
 A round hole, B, is punched in the pip of the card. On 
 the back of the card, along the edges, is then glued a nar- 
 row frame, consisting of two thickness of cards. A lever, C, 
 is then fasted ed to the back, being arranged so that it can 
 
250 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 be operated from an edge of the card. By moving the pro- 
 truding end of the lever, the end A, on which red paper has 
 been glued, can be made to cover the hole B, in the pip, at 
 will. On the frame is next glued an indifferent card, out of 
 the center of which a round hole has also been cut, which 
 corresponds to that made in the front card. The card, thus 
 arranged, may now be safely shown from both sides, as the 
 hole in the rear card is covered by the lever simultaneously 
 with that of the front card. 
 
 FIG. 178. 
 
 The conjurer gives this card to a friend, who, at the re- 
 port of the pistol, which of course contains only a blank 
 charge, moves the lever, causing the opening in both cards 
 to become visible. 
 
 By employing an entirely different plan, the card may 
 be inspected immediately after the shot has been fired. For 
 this purpose, the conjurer has previously punched a round 
 hole in the Ace and, by means of soap, covered the aperture 
 with a loose pip, cut out of another card. At the report of 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 251 
 
 pistol, the friend who holds the card, simply removes the 
 attached pip and allows it to drop on the floor. The specta- 
 tors are now at liberty to inspect the card. 
 
 MOVING PIP CARD. 
 
 I HE Moving Pip or Hair Card is no doubt the most 
 ingeniously constructed and at the same time one 
 of the most useful of mechanical cards. One 
 feature that will particularly commend it to my 
 readers, is that during the transformation of the card, the 
 
 FIG. 179. 
 latter is held in full view, not being covered in any way. 
 The mechanism, which consists of hairs, cannot possibly be 
 noticed at a distance of even a few feet. 
 
252 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 r 
 
 \ "1 
 
 
 \\\ 
 
 /. 
 
 
 /^" 
 
 \j\ 
 
 
 c 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 \ 
 
 r^^ 
 
 i; - «/ 
 
 .J) 
 
 V ^ — > 
 
 
 L^' y 
 
 FIG. 180. 
 
 FIG. 181. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 258 
 
 Figs. 179 and 180 give a full view of the front and the 
 inside back of the card. B B are two loops of strong silk 
 thread. C is a lever, which can be moved back and forth. 
 By means of rivet E, it is fastened to D, a strip of metal, 
 which is secured to the card by means of two strips of mus- 
 lin (P, F) glued over it. To the lever C, are glued three 
 hairs (1, 2, 3), which, after passing through loop B, are led 
 in an upward direction through three small holes in the 
 card; thence they pass through the loose pip (G) of the card, 
 
 ^r 
 
 ^r 
 
 
 FIG. 182. 
 
 which is glued to them. Thence over the face of the card; af- 
 ter which they are led through three other small holes, cov- 
 ered by G in Fig. 179: thence through second loop B, and fin- 
 ally return to the lever C, to which they are glued. 
 
 After the reader once understands this rather compli- 
 cated construction, he will readily perceive, that by moving 
 the projecting point of the lever from the left towards the 
 right, pip E will be thereby pulled up to pip H, completely 
 covering the latter and thus cause the card to visibly change 
 
254 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 from a Seven into a Six. The prepared card is backed with 
 an ordinary one, so that both of its sides may be freely 
 shown. 
 
 In Fig. 181 and 182 is shown the exterior appearance of 
 two cards, with two and four pips, respectively which move 
 simultaneously. As the mechanical arrangement used in 
 their construction is practically the same as that in the card 
 just described, I omit a detailed explanation of the interior 
 arrangement. Suffice it to say that in the card with the two 
 moving pips A and C, the latter are pulled up over the sta- 
 tionary pips B D completely covering them. In the quad- 
 ruple pip card, A C E G are the moving pips, A and C be- 
 ing pulled upward to cover the stationary pips B and D, 
 while E and G are pulled downwards , covering F and H. 
 
 A Mysterious Transformation 
 
 CARD, say the Nine of Hearts, is exhibited and 
 shown to be but one card, which the conjurer 
 places face downwards, on the extended hand of 
 a spectator. Commanding it to change into an en- 
 tirely different one, the performer requests the gentleman 
 holding it to look at it and it is now seen to have become 
 transformed into the Ace of Diamonds, which may be then 
 be thoroughly examined. 
 
 For this interesting experiment, the conjurer must pro- 
 vide himself with a Nine of Hearts, all the pips of which 
 have been neatly cut out with a sharp penknife. The sten- 
 cil thus obtained, is laid evenly on an Ace of Diamonds, a 
 small weight being then placed on either end of the double 
 card, to prevent them from shifting. The performer next 
 takes a quantity of dry vermillion or of chrome red, pro- 
 curable at any paint store, and places it in the center of sev 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 255 
 
 eral thicknesses of fine muslin or linen, gathering up the 
 corners of the latter and tying a string around the bag thus 
 obtained. Holding it above the double card, he hits the bag 
 repeated taps with a knife, causing a fine shower of the dry 
 red to fall on the two cards. The tapping process is continu- 
 ed until the stenciled pips are well covered over, after which 
 the two weights and upper cards are carefully removed and 
 placed aside. The lower card, which now represents the 
 
 FIG. 183. 
 
 Nine of Hearts is then gently laid on the top of the pack, 
 from where the performer takes it at the commencement of 
 the trick. After holding it up high, so that every one can 
 get a good view of the card, the conjurer lowers the hand 
 and to prove that he has but the one card, hits its back a 
 sharp tap with the wand. 
 
 The stenciled points thereby become dislodged and fall 
 off, the card having now resumed its former apppearance, 
 the Ace of Diamonds, which is then given to a gentleman 
 to hold, or, what is still better, is placed face downwards on 
 
256 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 the table. By moving it about a little, all remaining par- 
 ticles of the dry color are thereby wiped off, so that upon 
 examination of the card, nothing unusual can be discovered. 
 
 Enamelled cards are naturally better adapted for the 
 experiment than the ordinary cards as, from the former, 
 any remaining traces of the paint can be readily removed 
 by sliding the card across the top of the table. 
 
 In order to make the trick complete, the pack is exam- 
 ined after the pretended Nine of Hearts has been given 
 to some one to hold, and is then placed on the table, the top 
 of which is covered with black or any plain colored mater- 
 ial. On this lies, face downwards, the real Nine of Hearts, 
 the back of which is painted the same color as that of the 
 table top. The pack is laid on top of the card and, , after 
 the change of the Nine of Hearts into the Ace of Diamonds 
 has taken place, the cards are picked up and with them the 
 hidden Nine of Hearts, which seems to have returned to its 
 original place. 
 
 THE NEW INK CABJD. 
 
 jLTHOUGH the card of this name cannot possibly 
 be used in the course of any card trick, a des- 
 cription of it is nevertheless given, for the reason 
 that the card is purely mechanical. 
 The Ink Card is used only in the well known trick, in 
 which the contents of a glass or glass vase, seemingly filled 
 with ink, are changed into clear water. The ink, in this 
 case, is only a sham, the glass really containing water, which 
 is given the appearance of ink by a piece of black silk, with 
 which the inside of the glass is lined. The silk is carried 
 away with a handkerchief, previously placed over the glass; 
 or, in the latest form of the trick, the glass is noljcovered 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 257 
 
 at all, the silk lining being pulled into the leg of the table, 
 through the hollow foot of the glass. 
 
 To demonstrate the genuiness of the ink, it has always 
 been customary with conjurers, to dip a playing card partly 
 into the liquid and take it out, showing the lower half of the 
 card to be blackened. In the past, this has been accom- 
 plished by previously gluing two similar cards back to back, 
 the lower half of one being painted black. The unprepared 
 side of the card is exhibited, before dipping the latter into 
 the glass, it being turned around during this act, thus show- 
 ing, when taken out, the blackened lower half. 
 
 FIG. 184. 
 
 The New Ink Card is a decided improvement on this, as 
 both sides are exhibited before and after the the trick, the 
 card being then passed out for inspection. i 
 
 For this purpose, the lower half of a 'Ten of Diamonds 
 is first blackened on both sides. Fig. 184. Over it is then 
 slipped a pocket (C, Fig. 185), consisting of a half of a 
 second Ten of Diamonds, to which is attached half of the 
 
258 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 back of another card, thus hiding both sides of B, the 
 blackened part of the card proper. The card thus prepared, 
 is casually shown from both sides, being held by the mid- 
 dle finger and thumb, which are placed over the edge of the 
 pocket, C. The first finger is now placed on the top edge 
 
 FIG. 185. 
 of the card, which, in this position, is dipped into the pre- 
 tended ink. At the same time, pressure is exercised by the 
 first finger, the pocket C slides up, covering A and disclosing 
 B, the lower half, blackened as if having been colored by the 
 ink. After both sides of the card have been shown, the 
 pocket C is secretly slipped off, palmed, and the card given 
 for inspection. 
 
 THB ENVELOPE CARD. 
 
 IHE CARD of this name, is quite a departure from 
 other existing mechanical cards. After a card 
 has been selected and returned to the pack, the 
 latter is given, in custody of a spectator. An en- 
 velope containing a note, is then brought to the performer, 
 who after reading it, passes his hand over the envelope and 
 causes it to change into the chosen card, which he^^hows 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 259 
 
 from both sides. Upon inspection of the pack, the card is 
 found to be missing". 
 
 As my reader is possibly aware of the fact, that the 
 selected card is a forced one, palmed off after its return to 
 the pack, I shall proceed at once to the description of the 
 
 FIG. 186. 
 
 construction of the Envelope Card, which is illustrated in 
 Fig. 186 and 187. The envelope used is a rather small one, 
 being of the same size as a playing card. As indicated in the 
 drawing, it may be folded face to face or back to back, a 
 cloth strip serving as a hinge. On the rear side of the 
 
 I 
 
 FIG. 187. 
 
 opened envelope, is pasted a card and its back. If properly 
 made, the envelope, which contains a small sheet of paper, 
 cannot be told from the genuine article. 
 
 The trick envelope is in readiness behind the scenes 
 and is brought in at the proper moment by the assistant 
 
260 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The performer opens its flap, extracts the note and after 
 pretending to read it, replaces the note in the envelope. 
 Quickly turning it on its hinge, he shows it transformed in- 
 to the selected card, both sides of which are exhibited. 
 
 The trick is a very neat one, especialy suitable for par- 
 lor work and may be effectively combined with other ex- 
 periments, thereby forming a acceptable departure from the 
 usual run of card tricks. 
 
 THE VANISHING PIPS, 
 
 NINE of Diamonds in this trick is transformed in- 
 to the Five of the same suit; this is changed into 
 a Three, and the Three into the Ace of Diamonds. 
 Not satisfied with this orderly disappearance of 
 the pips, the performer gives the card a final rub and this 
 time causes the last pip to vanish, the card, both sides of 
 which are now shown, having now become perfectly blank. 
 
 FIG. 188. 
 
 Figures 188 and 189 will enable my reader, to readily under- 
 stand the construction of this card, which in its present im- 
 proved state, forms quite a clever trick, especially in the 
 hands of a skilled performer, possessed of any real dexter- 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 261 
 
 ity. He will not stop at the effect I have described but 
 finish the trick by altogether vanishing the blank card. 
 
 The card which is of a similar construction as the En- 
 velope Card, is a double folding one. After sides 1 and 2, 
 which temporarily form the front and back of the card, are 
 turned face to face, sides 3 and 4 taking their place, the card 
 represents a blank. 
 
 ^ ^ , - 
 
 4 
 
 p B 
 
 
 
 b d 
 
 
 V 
 
 FIG. 189. 
 
 The gradual lessening of the number of pips is equally sim- 
 ple. It will be seen that the two pips A and B of the Nine 
 are missing, which fact the conjurer conceals by holding 
 the tips of the first and second fingers of the left hand over 
 these places during its exhibition. In order to transform 
 the seeming Nine into a Five, he simply transfers the card 
 to the right hand, at the same time covering pips C D with 
 the tips of the first and second fingers. Under pretext of 
 rubbing this card, he quickly turns it around and covering E 
 with the thumb, shows that the card has become a Three. 
 To change the latter into the Ace, the card is transferred to 
 the other hand, being turned around during the operation 
 and the thumb placed over pip E. Finally, under pretense 
 of rubbing it, the double card is folded face to face, and 
 shown to have become a blank card. 
 
262 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 THE TURNING CARD, 
 
 |HE CARD of this title is used exclusively in the 
 Rising Card Trick, in which one of the selected 
 cards, usualy a Jack, ascends with its back to 
 the company. The performer pretends to be vex- 
 ed at this and sharply orders the card to turn around and 
 rise, face foremost, which command is instantly obeyed. 
 In Fig. 190, which represents the card in the act of turning 
 around, the principle upon which its construction is based, 
 is conveyed more concisely and clearly than can be done 
 
 with words. The upper part of the card revolves and is 
 folded against the face of the card itself, which in this con- 
 dition, is inserted in the duplicate pack, prepared for the 
 Rising Cards. While the card is rising back foremost to all 
 appearance, the instant the mechanical upper part protrudes 
 beyond the edge of the pack, it turns around very quickly, 
 owing to an inserted strip of rubber and folds itself^ on the 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 263 
 
 back of the card, which is shown from both sides after its 
 removal from the pack. 
 
 The Reunited Card, 
 
 jPTER A card, say the Queen of Hearts, has been 
 selected, it is cut with scissors into four pieces of 
 equal size by the person who took the card. 
 Taking these pieces from the spectator, the con- 
 jurer throws them into the air, in which the pieces reunite 
 into a complete card, which the performer exhibits, and if 
 desired, passes for inspection. 
 
 FIG. 191. 
 The construction of this card is as follows : A Queen of 
 Hearts is cut into four equal parts, which are glued on a 
 
264 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 piece of sheet rubber, of the same size as the card, Fig. 191. 
 Another card is then cut into four pieces, which are glued, 
 back uppermost, on the rear side of the rubber. Fig. 192. If 
 neatly made, a card thus prepared, cannot be told from an 
 ordinary one even at slight distance. This card may be 
 folded in four, instantly expanding to its full size when re- 
 leased. The folded trick card is concealed about the per- 
 former's body in such a way, that possession of it may be 
 
 m 
 
 FIG. 192. 
 
 readily obtained. A duplicate Queen of Hearts is now 
 forced on some one, who is requested to cut the card into 
 four pieces. While this is being done, the performer gets 
 possession of the folded trick card, which he keeps conceal- 
 ed in his hand. After receiving the pieces from the specta- 
 tor, he substitutes for them the folded card, the packets resem- 
 bling one another. Throwing the trick card into the air, the 
 pieces seem apparently to join, coming down a complete 
 card, which the performer casually shows. If some one 
 evinces a desire to examine the restored card, the,, latter is 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 265 
 
 exchanged for another unprepared which should be in readi- 
 ness on top of the pack for such an occasion. 
 
 THE CARD AND BROKEN M IBB OB. 
 
 |PTER a card has been selected, it is returned to the 
 pack, which the performer throws against a mir- 
 ror, with the result that all but one of the cards, 
 together with some fragments of the glass, fall to 
 the floor. The chosen one, however, remains attached to 
 the mirror and is removed by the performer, when it is dis- 
 covered that the mirror is seriously damaged, a large ragged 
 hole being visible to everybody. After due apologies on 
 the part of the conjurer, he gathers up the broken pieces 
 and wraps them in a handkerchief, with which he wipes the 
 broken mirror; when, to everyone's astonishment, the mir- 
 ror is seen to have been completely restored, all trace of 
 the breakage having mysteriously disappeared. 
 
 For this trick, the performer requires a prepared card. 
 Fig. 193, which consists of two cards glued together at the 
 top and sides. Its lower end is left open and a folding flap, 
 consisting of a narrow strip of another card, is glued there- 
 on. In the pocket thus formed, a number of small bits of 
 broken mirror are then concealed. Furthermore, the con- 
 jurer requires a star (Fig. 194) cut out of tinfoil, which, by 
 means of a trifling quantity of wax, is lightly attached to 
 the back of the prepared card. On the center of the other 
 side of the star, as well as on its points, wax is also thinly 
 spread. 
 
 The card thus prepared, is lying face upwards on the 
 table. The performer then proceeds to force a card similar 
 to it and, after having it returned to the pack, places 
 
266 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 FIG. 193. 
 
 FIG. 194, 
 
• NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 267 
 
 the latter, under some pretext, on the table, laying it direct- 
 ly on top of the prepared card. Picking up pack and pre- 
 pared card together, a few seconds later, he throws it flatly 
 against the mirror, to which the star and the rear card ad- 
 here, while the remainder of the pack, together with the 
 bits of glass which slip out of the pocket, fall to the floor. 
 The card is next removed, the star which is left attached to 
 the mirror, giving it a perfect resemblance of having been 
 broken. With thp handkerchief, in which the fragments of 
 glass are wrapped, the performer removes the star and any 
 remaining particjes of the wax, thus restoring the glass to 
 its former unbroken state. 
 
 THE COIN CARD. 
 
 ^N THIS trick, a borrowed coin is made to vanish and 
 mysteriously reappear on the upper edge of a selected 
 ^ card, which is given for inspection after the coin has 
 be^n removed. 
 The principle used in the construction of this card is 
 identical with that of the New Ink Card, previously ex- 
 plained; a removable pocket (C, Fig. 195) being slipped over 
 an ordinary card, B. 
 
 After the conjurer has secretly gained possession of the 
 borrowed and marked coin and left a marked duplicate in a 
 spectator's charge, he retires for a. moment, under some pre- 
 text, and secretly inserts the palmed, borrowed coin into 
 the pocket, C. Before doing so, however, he attaches to 
 the coin, by means of a pellet of wax, the hair loop (A, A) 
 which passes through a small hole in the upper end of the 
 card, as shown in the drawing. 
 
 Palming this card, he returns to the stage, forces a sim- 
 ilar card, secretly substituting for it the prepared card. 
 
268 
 
 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 Taking the coin from the spectator with the right hand and 
 holding the card in the left, the first finger of the latter in- 
 serted in the hair loop projecting on the back of the card, 
 he pretends to throw the coin at the card, really palming it. 
 At the same time, the first finger of the left hand pulls the 
 loop, the coin being thereby drawn out of its hiding place 
 and pulled against the small hole in the upper end of the 
 card. After disposing of the palmed coin, the performer de- 
 taches the borrowed coin from the hair loop, which is pulled 
 out of the hole and allowed to drop on the floor. In trans- 
 
 FIG. 195. 
 ferring the prepared card to the other hand, he slips off the 
 pocket C and retains it palmed in the first hand, with the 
 other hand passing the card for inspection; 
 
 In order to do away with the necessity of fetching and 
 preparing the Coin Card during the progress of the trick, 
 the card must contain a duplicate coin before the trick. 
 The borrowed coin, in this case, is taken in the right hand, 
 which palms it, while pretending to throw it at the card. 
 With the first finger of the other hand, the coin is pulled out 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 269 
 
 of the pocket and drawn against the hole, from which place 
 it is removed by the conjurer, who, in the act of returning 
 it to its owner, exchanges it for the palmed coin originally 
 borrowed. 
 
 The Eclipsed Pack of Cards. 
 
 T THE finish of some card trick, the performer 
 spreads the cards he has been using, in fan shape, 
 and, closing them, pretends to toss them into the 
 air, during which process they vanish completely, 
 no trace whatever, both of the performer's hands 
 being shown to be perfectly empty. 
 
 The cards used during this experiment are prepared, be- 
 ing really half cards. For this purpose, about twenty cards 
 
 leavim 
 
 FIG. 196. 
 are cut diagonally across, the cut extending from the lower 
 right corner of the card to the upper left corner. A num- 
 ber of triangularly shaped pieces are thus obtained, which 
 are placed evenly on top of one another. Through the lower 
 
270 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 pointed end of these cards, a hole is made, in which is in- 
 serted a brass wire, which is ri vetted at each end, thus se- 
 curely holding the cards together, but allowing them to be 
 spread out in fan shape. To this end of the pack is then 
 attached a strong black thread, which passes up through 
 the right sleeve of the performer's coat, thence over the 
 back of his vest down to one of the rear suspender buttons, 
 to which it is fastened. 
 
 During the performance, the prepared pack lies snugly 
 concealed in the right coat sleeve, so that the performer can 
 obtain it at the desired moment and substitute it for the Ijona 
 fide pack. The prepared cards are then spread out as shown 
 in Fig. 196, the missing lower part of the top card being 
 covered by the fingers. With the left hand, the conjurer 
 then seizes the slack part of the thread, while the right, at 
 the same time, closes up the cards and pretends to toss them 
 into the air. A quick, sharp pull is given to the thread by 
 the left hand, causing the cards to be pulled with great rapid- 
 ity into the right sleeve. 
 
 % 
 
 TUB DIMINISHING CARDS. 
 
 IHE TRICK of this title is a favorite with conjurers 
 the world over. The performer takes a pack of 
 cards, presumably the ones that he has used in 
 the preceding experiments, and, pretending to 
 squeeze it, causes the cards to become half their former 
 size. After displaying these cards, he once more covers 
 them with his hand and this time reduces them to about one- 
 fourth their original size. These cards, small as they are, 
 are made to diminish again and again, until finally, they have 
 become the veriest miniature cards, being less than Jialf an 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 271 
 
 inch long and proportionately wide. Holding this tiny pack 
 at the tips of the fingers, the conjurer gives it a final rub, 
 causing the cards to vanish altogether. 
 
 FIRST METHOD. 
 
 |LTHOUGH the trick depends, to a certain extent, 
 upon the cards, which are prepared for the pur- 
 pose, it nevertheless requires considerable dex- 
 terity, acquired by constant practice, in order to 
 perform it with any degree of nicety. 
 
 Fig. 197 shows the arrangement of the first and largest 
 pack, consisting of several ordinary cards (which, however, 
 are discarded at the first stage of the trick) and a prepared 
 card, the Jack of Hearts, which is hinged in the center. To 
 
 FIG. 197. 
 the back of the upper and lower halves, A and B, are rivet- 
 ted a number of cards of half size. Under the pretense of 
 rubbing or squeezing the pack, the large card, which is sup- 
 posed to be the first one of a number of similar cards, is 
 folded at the hinge, the pack being thus transformed into a 
 
272 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 smaller one, which can be spread out fan-like, as shown in 
 Fig. 198. On the upper part of the backs of the cards just 
 mentioned, are pasted still smaller cards (Fig. 199), the 
 
 FIG. 199. 
 lower part of the card beings left blank or, preferably, black- 
 ened. ' When the performer wishes to transform the half 
 sized cards into smaller ones, he simply turns the cards 
 around while pretending to rub them; concealing the lower 
 blackened half behind the fingers of the hand that holds 
 the cards. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 2n 
 
 While exibiting the last cards mentioned, the conjurer 
 gets possession of a separate pack (the smallest shown) which 
 consists of a number of cards, held together by a rivet in 
 one corner. This he secretly places behind the cards he is 
 showing. Closing up the pack, he palms it oft", under the 
 pretext of rubbing it, at the same time dropping the palmed 
 cards into his profonde or on the servante of the table. 
 The miniature pack is then made to disappear, by means of 
 the pass, the sleight called "The Tourniquet'* being usually 
 employed for this purpose. 
 
 SECOND METHOD. 
 
 Fig. 200 illustrates a method which is superior to the 
 preceding one, inasmuch as each pack used may be spread 
 out and exhibited, the hand being casually shown to contain 
 no other cards. 
 
 FIG. 200. 
 Across the back C, of the folding court card AB, is 
 glued a flat elastic band G, under which is slipped the next 
 smaller pack C, the cards of which are connected by a rivet 
 in one corner. To the rear card of the pack is glued a sec- 
 ond elastic band G, which serves to hold the cards of the 
 next smaller size, D. On the back of the latter, pack E is 
 attached, to which the miniature cards F are fastened in a 
 
274 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 similar manner. 
 
 A is a King of Hearts, of half size, glued to the back of 
 the lower half of a large card, B denoting the other half 
 of the latter. The trick then proceeds in nearly the same 
 manner as described in the first method. On the folding 
 court card are placed several loose cards, which are either 
 carelessly discarded at the opening of the trick, or which 
 may be thrown among the spectators, apparently with the 
 intention of allowing them to inspect the cards, but in re- 
 ality furnishing the conjurer a suitable pretext for dispos- 
 ing of them. The pack is then covered with the other hand, 
 under cover of which, A is folded over on B, the cards of 
 half size thereby becoming disclosed. The pack is spread 
 out and, after being shown, closed again and the pretense of 
 squeezing it, repeated. What the conjurer really does, un- 
 der cover of this movement, is to slip the pack D out of the 
 elastic holding it, palming the cards just shown in the same 
 hand which holds D, the back of the hand being turned to- 
 wards the company. The other hand spreads out pack D, 
 thus conveying to the spectators the impression that only 
 the pack D is contained in the hands. Transferring this 
 pack to the other hand, the performer, with the hand that 
 is palming the other cards, picks up the wand from the ta- 
 ble, at the same time dropping the palmed cards on the ser- 
 vante. The process of slipping the next size of cards from 
 under the elastic holding it is now repeated, the cards last 
 shown being palmed and dropped on the servante, under the 
 pretext of laying down the wand. When the smallest pack 
 is finally reached, it is first shown from both sides and made 
 to disappear by means of the Tourniquet. 
 THIRD METHOD. 
 
 This form of construction of the Diminishing Pack, al- 
 though identical in its principal points wich the plan just 
 described, is preferred by many, as in this we dispense with 
 rubber bands, which, in the course of time, are apt to be- 
 come weak. 
 
 Each separate pack, in this case, is glued to a.piece of 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 275 
 
 metal of proper size, so planned that one end can be turned 
 over, forming a clip, as shown in Pig. 201. Thus B and C 
 
 -^ A 
 
 FIG. 201. 
 
 indicate the metal back and clip, glued to the rear side 
 of the half sized cards, a metal rivet extending through 
 both cards and metal. D and E represent the clips for the 
 next sizes of cards; while F indicates the smallest pack, 
 which is held under clip E and which consists of separate 
 cards, connected at one corner by a thread, which fulfills the 
 purpose of a rivet. 
 
 The manner of performing the trick is similar to that 
 described in the preceding method. 
 
 As a good plan of combining the Diminishing Pack with 
 another card trick will naturally prove acceptable to most 
 of my readers, I take pleasure in making them acquainted 
 with an excellent outline of a logical pretext for the succes- 
 sive reduction of the size of the cards. 
 
 All of my professional readers are probably acquainted 
 with that excellent trick described by Robert- Houdin, in 
 which a number of cards apparently travel, one at a time, 
 up the performer's sleeve, passing into his vest. 
 
 After having performed this trick, the conjurer makes a 
 pretended explanation by telling the spectators that he 
 causes the cards to dematerialize, so that they, when in this 
 
27<d NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 state, easily pass up the sleeve and when in the vest, are 
 materialized again, resuming their former shape. He ex- 
 plains that the process of dematerialization simply consists 
 of a gradual but rapid reduction of the size of the cards, 
 and promises to perform this process so slowly, that every- 
 one present can see and thoroughly comprehend the nature 
 of the experiment. 
 
 While he is telling his patter in about this manner, he 
 has held the twelve cards, that have just passed up his 
 sleeve, in his left hand, taking care that, for instance, the 
 Queen of Clubs, which is among them, is turned face to- 
 wards the audience. While talking, he secretly obtains pos- 
 session of the diminishing pack, the front card of which is 
 also a Queen of Clubs, and unobserved places it back of the 
 unprepared cards in his hand. In explaining the process of 
 the cards passing up the sleeve, he places his right hand 
 carelessly over the loose cards, palming them and thrusting 
 his hand into his vest, in the act of indicating what is to 
 take place, leaves the palmed cards. As the large card of 
 the prepared pack is similar to the first one of the loose 
 cards, the execution of this sleight will create no suspicion, 
 as the cards are to all appearances left stalu quo. The pre- 
 pared pack is now successively reduced in size, the smallest 
 pack being, as usual, palmed with the right hand. With the 
 left, the conjurer then reaches into his vest and produces 
 from there, the apparently materialized cards, which, to in- 
 crease the effect, may be marked by the spectators previous 
 to the trick. 
 
 FOURTH METHOD. 
 
 This method is entirely different from the preceding 
 ones, the performer apparently experimenting with full 
 packs, which he exhibits from both sides at each stage of 
 reduction in the size of the cards. 
 
 The secret of the trick may be told in a few words, the 
 different packs being nested, each pack forming a sort of a 
 box for the size next smaller. Besides these dummy packs, 
 a few loose cards of corresponding sizes are employed. 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 277 
 
 The large pack (A, Fig. 203) consists of about sixteen 
 cards, which, after being glued together, are then cut out 
 to accommodate the next smaller cards, B. These also, af- 
 ter gluing, are similarly cut out and contain the pack C, in 
 which are placed the packs D and E, both of which consist 
 of separate cards, held by a rivet or thread in one corner. 
 On the backs of each of the dummy packs, A, B and C, are 
 
 A 
 
 FIG. 203. 
 placed a few cards of the same sizes respectively. Pig. 204 
 illustrates the exact arrangement. Before placing packs B 
 and C inside of A, a very fine silk thread or a hair is firmly 
 tied around each pack and accompanying loose cards, in or- 
 
 FiG. 204. 
 
 der to hold them in place. 
 
278 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The various packs having been assembled in the man- 
 ner shown, a loose card is placed on the back of A, thus 
 hiding all trace of preparation. After the pack thus pre- 
 pared has been shown, the rear card is removed and either 
 placed aside or in front of the pack, which is then covered 
 with the disengaged hand, under pretense of squeezing it. 
 The dummy pack A and its free cards, are palmed off and 
 pack B exhibited instead. At the same time, the palmed 
 pack is dropped on the servante of the table. After break- 
 ing the hair surrounding pack B, the conjurer spreads the 
 latter and shows it from both sides, carefully masking the 
 the opening in the rear of the dummy pack by placing a 
 loose card over it. This card is transferred to the front of 
 the pack, which in turn is palmed off and dropped on the 
 servante. After pack C has been treated in a similar man- 
 ner, the performer has left only packs D and E; E being 
 hidden behind D. After D has been spread out and shown, 
 it is palmed off under pretense of rubbing it, and E dis- 
 closed, which, after being freely exhibited, is made to dis- 
 appear by means of the pass. 
 
ERRATA. 
 
 Page 13, Line 5 — Fig. 7 instead of Fig. 8. 
 " 13, " 22— " 8 " " 2. 
 
 " 31, " 22— Buatier " Beautier. 
 
 " 35. — Second Method commences at Line 31. 
 " 56. ^Corrected table: 
 
 27 14 1 43 30 17 8 46 33 24 11 49 15 
 2 40 31 18 5 47 34 21 12 50 37 3 41 
 
 28 19 6 44 35 22 9 51 38 25 42 29 16 
 7 45 32 23 10 48 39 26 13 4 20 36 52 
 
 " 58.— Fig. 28 instead of Fig. 26. 
 " 70.— " 33 '' " 29." 
 
 *' 111, Line 1 — Obedient instead of Obediant. 
 
280 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 LIST OF CONTENTS. 
 
 SLEIGHTS. 
 
 The Double Handed Pass 7 
 
 The Herrmann Pass 10 
 
 The Charlier Pass 13 
 
 The Force 16 
 
 Changes 17 
 
 The Top Change 18 
 
 The Bottom Change 19 
 
 The New Top Change 20 
 
 The Mexican Turn Over 22 
 
 The Excelsior Change 22 
 
 The Color Change '. 24 
 
 First Method 24 
 
 Second Method 25 
 
 Third Method 27 
 
 Fourth Method 27 
 
 The Card Palm 29 
 
 The Regular Palm 29 
 
 The Buatier Palm 31 
 
 The Back Hand Palm 32 
 
 New Thought Card Sleights 34 
 
 First Method 35 
 
 Second Method 35 
 
 Third Method 36 
 
 The New Glimpse 37 
 
 First Method 38 
 
 Second Method 38 
 
 Third Method 39 
 
 The Bridge 4o 
 
 The Prearranged Pack 41 
 
 The Glide 42 
 
 The Revolution - • - :. 43 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 281 
 
 False Shuffles 44 
 
 The Cut 44 
 
 Shuffling the Entire Pack 46 
 
 For One Card 46 
 
 TRICKS WITH CARDS. 
 
 Ne Plus Ultra 48 
 
 First Method 48 
 
 Second Method 55 
 
 ^Penetration of Matter 57 
 
 First Method 57 
 
 Second Method 59 
 
 Magic Versus Mnemonics 61 
 
 The Card Receptacle 63 
 
 The Appearance of Desired Cards 64 
 
 The Mysterious Production 65 
 
 The Improved Mysterious Production 66 
 
 The Improved Cards Read Behind the Back 67 
 
 The Hypnotised Card . . 68 
 
 The Queen of the Air 69 
 
 Tne Lost Found 71 
 
 The Card Caught on the Plate 72 
 
 The Lantern of Diogenes 73 
 
 Extraordinary Restoration ; 75 
 
 Apparent Second Sight 76 
 
 The Attached Card 78 
 
 Cards Shot Against a Hat 80 
 
 War in Peace I 82 
 
 The New Card Table 83 
 
 Thought Reading Extraordinary 85 
 
 A Mysterious Change 87 
 
 The Card and Handkerchief 89 
 
 The Itinerant Card 9 [ 
 
 The Terpsichorean Card 92 
 
 The Card in the Pocket 94 
 
 The Spectator as Corjurer 95 
 
 Gravity Defied 97 
 
 The Demon Envelope ^ 1 00 
 
 The Ubiquitous Card 102 
 
 Four Cards Caught at the Fingertips 103 
 
 The Card, Ribbon and Envelope 106 
 
 Facilis Descensus Averno 108 
 
 The Obedient Card in 
 
282 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 The Card Appearing on the Bottle. . . II2 
 
 First Method 112 
 
 Second Method 1 14 
 
 The Card on the Table Edge 115 
 
 The Mysteries of the Zodiac 116 
 
 The Cards, Coins and Glass 125 
 
 First Method 1 25 
 
 Second Method 126 
 
 Third Method 128 
 
 The Halved Card 130 
 
 The Phoenix ; 132 
 
 The Lost Ace 133 
 
 Thought Foretold 135 
 
 The Pierced Card 136 
 
 The Card Box 138 
 
 The Mechanical Card Box 139 
 
 The Brass Card Box 141 
 
 The New Brass Card Box ; . , . . 142 
 
 The Vanishing of Thought Cards 143 
 
 X Rays 144 
 
 First Method 144 
 
 Second Method 145 
 
 The Balanced Card . 146 
 
 The Lightning Change 148 
 
 The Card Servante 149 
 
 Rapid Transit 151 
 
 The Cards and the Orange Tree 151 
 
 Card, Ring and Ribbon 153 
 
 The Conjurer's Prediction 155 
 
 Handkerchief and Card 157 
 
 Marvelous Coincidence 158 
 
 Grand Card Maneuvre 160 
 
 The New General Card 162 
 
 The Small Card Frame 163 
 
 First Method 163 
 
 Second Method 165 
 
 Grande Clairvoyance Mysterieuse 167 
 
 First Method 168 
 
 Second Method 168 
 
 Third Method 169 
 
 The Bridge of Cards 170 
 
 The Cards and Mirror 171 
 
 The Spirit Envelope 173 
 
 The Divination of Thought 174 
 
NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 283 
 
 Mnemonics Applied to Cards 177 
 
 The Acrobatic Cards 180 
 
 Singular Transposition 182 
 
 First Method 182 
 
 Second Method 183 
 
 Vice Versa 185 
 
 A Hypnotic Experiment 186 
 
 The Mysterious Hat 190 
 
 Mystic Divination 191 
 
 Predestination 192 
 
 The Flying and Obedient Card 194 
 
 The New Multiplication of Cards 195 
 
 Card and Egg Balance 198 
 
 The Fountain of Cards 200 
 
 The New Rising Cards from the Hand 202 
 
 Second Method 204 
 
 The Cards Rising Through the Air 205 
 
 The ExcelvSior Rising Cards 207 
 
 The Rising Cards and Tumbler 209 
 
 A Comedy of Errors 211 
 
 First Method 211 
 
 Second Method ..211 
 
 Third Method 213 
 
 The Hand of Cagliostro 217 
 
 PREPARED AND MECHANICAL CARDS. 
 
 The Changing Card 220 
 
 The Unique Changing Card 223 
 
 The Diminishing Card 225 
 
 The Latest Diminishing Card 226 
 
 The Changing and Diminishing Card 229 
 
 The Changing and Enlarging Card 230 
 
 New Quadruple Changing Card 233 
 
 The Card and Rose 234 
 
 The Floral Card 236 
 
 The Penetrative Card 238 
 
 The Torn Corner Card 239 
 
 The Improved Torn Corner Card 241 
 
 The Flap Card 243 
 
 The Nonpareil Changing Card 244 
 
 Improved Nonpareil Changing Card 246 
 
 The Bottle Card 247 
 
 The Conjurer as Marksman 249 
 
284 NEW ERA CARD TRICKS. 
 
 Moving Pip Card 25 1 
 
 A Mysterious Transformation 254 
 
 The New Ink Card 256 
 
 The Envelope Card 258 
 
 The Vanishing Pips 260 
 
 The Turning Card 262 
 
 The Reunited Card 263 
 
 The Card and Broken Mirror 265 
 
 The Coin Card 267 
 
 Eclipsed Pack of Cards 269 
 
 The Diminishing Cards 270 
 
 First Method 271 
 
 Second Method 273 
 
 Third Method 274 
 
 Fourth Method 276 
 
 The Johnston Printing Company, 
 
 I & 3 North Clark Street, 
 CHICAGO. 
 
f 
 
 U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 k